Annotation of embedaddon/readline/doc/texinfo.tex, revision 1.1.1.1
1.1 misho 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2: %
3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5: %
6: \def\texinfoversion{2013-09-11.11}
7: %
8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9: % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10: % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11: %
12: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
13: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
15: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
16: %
17: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
20: % General Public License for more details.
21: %
22: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23: % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
24: %
25: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
26: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
27: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
28: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
29: %
30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
32: % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
33: % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
34: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
35: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
36: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
37: %
38: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
39: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
40: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
41: %
42: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
43: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
44: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
45: % tex foo.texi
46: % texindex foo.??
47: % tex foo.texi
48: % tex foo.texi
49: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
50: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
51: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
52: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
53: %
54: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
55: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
56: % full Texinfo distribution.
57: %
58: % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
59:
60:
61: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
62:
63: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
64: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
65: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
66: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
67: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
68:
69: \chardef\other=12
70:
71: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
72: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
73: \let\+ = \relax
74:
75: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
76: \let\ptexb=\b
77: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
78: \let\ptexc=\c
79: \let\ptexcomma=\,
80: \let\ptexdot=\.
81: \let\ptexdots=\dots
82: \let\ptexend=\end
83: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
84: \let\ptexexclam=\!
85: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
86: \let\ptexgtr=>
87: \let\ptexhat=^
88: \let\ptexi=\i
89: \let\ptexindent=\indent
90: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
91: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
92: \let\ptexless=<
93: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
94: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
95: \let\ptexplus=+
96: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
97: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
98: \let\ptexslash=\/
99: \let\ptexstar=\*
100: \let\ptext=\t
101: \let\ptextop=\top
102: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
103:
104: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
105: % starts a new line in the output.
106: \newlinechar = `^^J
107:
108: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
109: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
110: %
111: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
112: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
113: \else
114: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
115: \fi
116:
117: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
118: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
119: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
120: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
121: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
122: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
123: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
124: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
125: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
126: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
127: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
128: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
129: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
130: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
131: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
132: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
133: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
134: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
135: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
136: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
137: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
138: %
139: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
140: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
141: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
142: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
143: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
144: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
145: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
146: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
147: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
148: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
149: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
150: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
151: %
152: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
153: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
154: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
155: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
156: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
157:
158: % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
159: \chardef\spacecat = 10
160: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
161:
162: % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
163: \chardef\ampChar = `\&
164: \chardef\colonChar = `\:
165: \chardef\commaChar = `\,
166: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
167: \chardef\dotChar = `\.
168: \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
169: \chardef\hashChar = `\#
170: \chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
171: \chardef\questChar = `\?
172: \chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
173: \chardef\semiChar = `\;
174: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
175: \chardef\underChar = `\_
176:
177: % Ignore a token.
178: %
179: \def\gobble#1{}
180:
181: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
182: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
183:
184: % Hyphenation fixes.
185: \hyphenation{
186: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
187: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
188: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
189: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
190: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
191: spell-ing spell-ings
192: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
193: wide-spread wrap-around
194: }
195:
196: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
197: \newdimen\bindingoffset
198: \newdimen\normaloffset
199: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
200:
201: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
202: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
203: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
204: %
205: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
206:
207: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
208: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
209: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
210: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
211: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
212: %
213: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
214: \def\loggingall{%
215: \tracingstats2
216: \tracingpages1
217: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
218: \tracingparagraphs1
219: \tracingoutput1
220: \tracingmacros2
221: \tracingrestores1
222: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
223: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
224: \tracingscantokens1
225: \tracingifs1
226: \tracinggroups1
227: \tracingnesting2
228: \tracingassigns1
229: \fi
230: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
231: \errorcontextlines16
232: }%
233:
234: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
235: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
236: % after all.
237: %
238: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
239: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
240:
241: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
242: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
243: %
244: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
245: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
246: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
247: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
248: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
249: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
250:
251: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
252: %
253: \newif\ifcropmarks
254: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
255: %
256: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
257: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
258: %
259: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
260: \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
261: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
262: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
263:
264: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
265: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
266: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
267: %
268: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
269: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
270: %
271: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
272: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
273: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
274: % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
275: % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
276: % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
277: \def\domark{%
278: \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
279: \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
280: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
281: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
282: \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
283: \mark{%
284: \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: top marks (\last...)
285: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: bottom marks (default, \prev...)
286: \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
287: }%
288: }
289: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
290: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
291: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
292: % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
293: % first @chapter.
294: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
295: \ifcase0\topmark\fi
296: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
297: }
298: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
299: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
300:
301: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
302: \def\lastchapterdefs{}
303: \def\lastsectiondefs{}
304: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
305: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
306: \def\lastcolordefs{}
307:
308: % Main output routine.
309: \chardef\PAGE = 255
310: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
311:
312: \newbox\headlinebox
313: \newbox\footlinebox
314:
315: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
316: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
317: \def\onepageout#1{%
318: \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
319: %
320: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
321: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
322: %
323: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
324: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
325: \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars}
326: %
327: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
328: \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
329: %
330: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
331: \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
332: %
333: {%
334: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
335: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
336: % before the \shipout runs.
337: %
338: \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
339: \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
340: % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
341: % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
342: % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
343: % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
344: % it needs to be
345: % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
346: \shipout\vbox{%
347: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
348: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
349: %
350: \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
351: \hsize = \outerhsize
352: \vskip-\topandbottommargin
353: \vtop to0pt{%
354: \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
355: \nointerlineskip
356: \line{%
357: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
358: \hfill
359: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
360: }%
361: \vss}%
362: \vskip\topandbottommargin
363: \line\bgroup
364: \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
365: \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
366: \vbox\bgroup
367: \fi
368: %
369: \unvbox\headlinebox
370: \pagebody{#1}%
371: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
372: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
373: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
374: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
375: \vskip 24pt
376: \unvbox\footlinebox
377: \fi
378: %
379: \ifcropmarks
380: \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
381: \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
382: \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
383: \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
384: \vbox to0pt{\vss
385: \line{%
386: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
387: \hfill
388: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
389: }%
390: \nointerlineskip
391: \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
392: }%
393: \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
394: \fi
395: }% end of \shipout\vbox
396: }% end of group with \indexdummies
397: \advancepageno
398: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
399: }
400:
401: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
402:
403: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
404: {\catcode`\@ =11
405: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
406: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
407: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
408: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
409: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
410: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
411: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
412: }
413:
414: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
415: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
416: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
417: %
418: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
419: \def\nstop{\vbox
420: {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
421: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
422: \def\nsbot{\vbox
423: {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
424:
425: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
426: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
427: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
428: %
429: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
430: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
431: \def\argtorun{#2}%
432: \begingroup
433: \obeylines
434: \spaceisspace
435: #1%
436: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
437: }
438:
439: {\obeylines %
440: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
441: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
442: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
443: }%
444: }
445:
446: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
447: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
448: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
449:
450: % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
451: %
452: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
453: % @end itemize @c foo
454: % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
455: % by \finishparsearg.
456: %
457: \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
458: \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
459: \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
460: \def\temp{#3}%
461: \ifx\temp\empty
462: % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
463: \let\temp\finishparsearg
464: \else
465: \let\temp\argcheckspaces
466: \fi
467: % Put the space token in:
468: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
469: }
470:
471: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
472: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
473: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
474: % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
475: % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
476: % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
477: % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
478: %
479: % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
480: %
481: \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
482:
483: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
484: % is roughly equivalent to
485: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
486: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
487: %
488: % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
489: % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
490:
491: \def\parseargdef#1{%
492: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
493: }
494: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
495: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
496: \def#1##1%
497: }
498:
499: % Several utility definitions with active space:
500: {
501: \obeyspaces
502: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
503:
504: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
505: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
506: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
507: % should produce a line of output anyway.
508: %
509: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
510:
511: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
512: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
513: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
514: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
515: }
516:
517:
518: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
519:
520: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
521: %
522: % \envdef\foo{...}
523: % \def\Efoo{...}
524: %
525: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
526: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
527: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
528: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
529: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
530: %
531: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
532: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
533: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
534: % special case.)
535:
536:
537: % At run-time, environments start with this:
538: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
539: % initialize
540: \let\thisenv\empty
541:
542: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
543: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
544: \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
545:
546: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
547: \def\checkenv#1{%
548: \def\temp{#1}%
549: \ifx\thisenv\temp
550: \else
551: \badenverr
552: \fi
553: }
554:
555: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
556: \def\badenverr{%
557: \errhelp = \EMsimple
558: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
559: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
560: }
561: \def\inenvironment#1{%
562: \ifx#1\empty
563: outside of any environment%
564: \else
565: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
566: \fi
567: }
568:
569: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
570: % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
571: %
572: \parseargdef\end{%
573: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
574: \else
575: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
576: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
577: \csname E#1\endcsname
578: \endgroup
579: \fi
580: }
581:
582: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
583:
584:
585: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
586: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
587: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
588: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
589: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
590: {\catcode`@ = 11
591: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
592: % if the definition is written into an index file.
593: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
594: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
595: }
596:
597: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
598: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
599:
600: % @* forces a line break.
601: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
602:
603: % @/ allows a line break.
604: \let\/=\allowbreak
605:
606: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
607: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
608:
609: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
610: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
611:
612: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
613: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
614:
615: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
616: %
617: \def\onword{on}
618: \def\offword{off}
619: %
620: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
621: \def\temp{#1}%
622: \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
623: \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
624: \else
625: \errhelp = \EMsimple
626: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
627: \fi\fi
628: }
629:
630: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
631: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
632: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
633: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
634:
635: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
636: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
637: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
638: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
639: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
640: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
641: % the text is small, which looks bad.
642: %
643: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
644: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
645: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
646: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
647: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
648: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
649: %
650: \newbox\groupbox
651: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
652: %
653: \envdef\group{%
654: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
655: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
656: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
657: \fi
658: \startsavinginserts
659: %
660: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
661: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
662: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
663: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
664: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
665: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
666: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
667: \comment
668: }
669: %
670: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
671: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
672: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
673: % above. But it's pretty close.
674: \def\Egroup{%
675: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
676: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
677: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
678: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
679: \egroup % End the \vtop.
680: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
681: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
682: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
683: \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
684: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
685: % group, force a page break.
686: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
687: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
688: \page
689: \fi
690: \fi
691: \box\groupbox
692: \prevdepth = \dimen1
693: \checkinserts
694: }
695: %
696: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
697: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
698: %
699: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
700: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
701: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
702:
703: % @need space-in-mils
704: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
705:
706: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
707:
708: \parseargdef\need{%
709: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
710: % paragraph.
711: \par
712: %
713: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
714: \dimen0 = #1\mil
715: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
716: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
717: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
718: %
719: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
720: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
721: % And a page break here is fine.
722: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
723: %
724: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
725: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
726: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
727: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
728: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
729: %
730: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
731: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
732: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
733: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
734: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
735: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
736: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
737: \penalty9999
738: %
739: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
740: \kern -#1\mil
741: %
742: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
743: \nobreak
744: \fi
745: }
746:
747: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
748:
749: \let\br = \par
750:
751: % @page forces the start of a new page.
752: %
753: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
754:
755: % @exdent text....
756: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
757:
758: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
759: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
760: \newskip\exdentamount
761:
762: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
763: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
764:
765: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
766: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
767: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
768:
769: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
770: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
771: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
772: %
773: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
774: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
775: %
776: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
777: \nobreak
778: \kern-\strutdepth
779: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
780: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
781: \vss
782: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
783: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
784: \ifx#1l%
785: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
786: \else
787: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
788: \fi
789: \null
790: }%
791: }}
792: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
793: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
794: %
795: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
796: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
797: % else use TEXT for both).
798: %
799: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
800: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
801: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
802: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
803: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
804: \def\righttext{#2}%
805: \else
806: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
807: \def\righttext{#1}%
808: \fi
809: %
810: \ifodd\pageno
811: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
812: \else
813: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
814: \fi
815: \temp
816: }
817:
818: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
819: % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
820: % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
821: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
822: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
823: % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
824: %
825: \def\|{%
826: % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
827: \leavevmode
828: %
829: % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
830: \vadjust{%
831: % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
832: % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
833: \vskip-\baselineskip
834: %
835: % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
836: % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
837: \llap{%
838: %
839: % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
840: \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
841: %
842: % This is the space between the bar and the text.
843: \hskip 12pt
844: }%
845: }%
846: }
847:
848: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
849: %
850: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
851: \def\includezzz#1{%
852: \pushthisfilestack
853: \def\thisfile{#1}%
854: {%
855: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
856: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
857: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
858: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
859: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
860: %
861: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
862: % definitions, etc.
863: \expandafter
864: }\temp
865: \popthisfilestack
866: }
867: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
868: \catcode`\\=\other
869: \catcode`~=\other
870: \catcode`^=\other
871: \catcode`_=\other
872: \catcode`|=\other
873: \catcode`<=\other
874: \catcode`>=\other
875: \catcode`+=\other
876: \catcode`-=\other
877: \catcode`\`=\other
878: \catcode`\'=\other
879: }
880:
881: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
882: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
883: }
884: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
885: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
886: }
887: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
888: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
889: }
890:
891: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
892: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
893: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
894: %
895: \def\thisfile{}
896:
897: % @center line
898: % outputs that line, centered.
899: %
900: \parseargdef\center{%
901: \ifhmode
902: \let\centersub\centerH
903: \else
904: \let\centersub\centerV
905: \fi
906: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
907: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
908: }
909: \def\centerH#1{{%
910: \hfil\break
911: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
912: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
913: \line{#1}%
914: \break
915: }}
916: %
917: \newcount\centerpenalty
918: \def\centerV#1{%
919: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
920: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
921: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
922: % prevent a page break here.
923: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
924: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
925: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
926: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
927: }
928:
929: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
930: %
931: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
932:
933: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
934: % @c is the same as @comment
935: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
936: %
937: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
938: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
939: \commentxxx}
940: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
941: %
942: \let\c=\comment
943:
944: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
945: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
946: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
947: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
948: %
949: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
950: \def\noneword{none}
951: %
952: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
953: \def\temp{#1}%
954: \ifx\temp\asisword
955: \else
956: \ifx\temp\noneword
957: \defaultparindent = 0pt
958: \else
959: \defaultparindent = #1em
960: \fi
961: \fi
962: \parindent = \defaultparindent
963: }
964:
965: % @exampleindent NCHARS
966: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
967: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
968: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
969: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
970: \def\temp{#1}%
971: \ifx\temp\asisword
972: \else
973: \ifx\temp\noneword
974: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
975: \else
976: \lispnarrowing = #1em
977: \fi
978: \fi
979: }
980:
981: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
982: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
983: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
984: % paragraphs.
985: %
986: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
987: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
988: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
989: % By default, we suppress indentation.
990: %
991: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
992: \def\insertword{insert}
993: %
994: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
995: \def\temp{#1}%
996: \ifx\temp\noneword
997: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
998: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
999: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
1000: \else
1001: \errhelp = \EMsimple
1002: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1003: \fi\fi
1004: }
1005:
1006: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
1007: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1008: %
1009: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1010: % paragraph.
1011: %
1012: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1013: \gdef\indent{%
1014: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1015: \indent
1016: }%
1017: \gdef\noindent{%
1018: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1019: \noindent
1020: }%
1021: \global\everypar = {%
1022: \kern -\parindent
1023: \restorefirstparagraphindent
1024: }%
1025: }
1026:
1027: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1028: \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1029: \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1030: \global \everypar = {}%
1031: }
1032:
1033:
1034: % @refill is a no-op.
1035: \let\refill=\relax
1036:
1037: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1038: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1039: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1040: %
1041: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1042: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1043:
1044: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1045: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1046: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1047: \def\setfilename{%
1048: \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1049: \iflinks
1050: \tryauxfile
1051: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1052: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1053: \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1054: \openindices
1055: \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1056: %
1057: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1058: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1059: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1060: \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1061: \closein 1
1062: %
1063: \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1064: }
1065:
1066: % Called from \setfilename.
1067: %
1068: \def\openindices{%
1069: \newindex{cp}%
1070: \newcodeindex{fn}%
1071: \newcodeindex{vr}%
1072: \newcodeindex{tp}%
1073: \newcodeindex{ky}%
1074: \newcodeindex{pg}%
1075: }
1076:
1077: % @bye.
1078: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1079:
1080:
1081: \message{pdf,}
1082: % adobe `portable' document format
1083: \newcount\tempnum
1084: \newcount\lnkcount
1085: \newtoks\filename
1086: \newcount\filenamelength
1087: \newcount\pgn
1088: \newtoks\toksA
1089: \newtoks\toksB
1090: \newtoks\toksC
1091: \newtoks\toksD
1092: \newbox\boxA
1093: \newcount\countA
1094: \newif\ifpdf
1095: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1096:
1097: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1098: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1099: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1100: \else
1101: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1102: \else
1103: \ifcase\pdfoutput
1104: \else
1105: \pdftrue
1106: \fi
1107: \fi
1108: \fi
1109:
1110: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1111: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1112: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1113: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1114: %
1115: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1116: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1117: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1118: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1119: % do this reliably, so we use it.
1120:
1121: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1122: % which we \xdef.
1123: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1124: \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
1125: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1126: % Many times it won't matter.
1127: \else
1128: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1129: % backslashes, and other special chars.
1130: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1131: \fi
1132: }
1133:
1134: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1135: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1136: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1137: output) for that.)}
1138:
1139: \ifpdf
1140: %
1141: % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
1142: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1143: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1144: % of actual black.
1145: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1146: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1147: %
1148: % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1149: % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1150: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
1151: %
1152: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1153: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1154: \def\setcolor#1{%
1155: \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1156: \domark
1157: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1158: }
1159: %
1160: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1161: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1162: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1163: \def\lastcolordefs{}
1164: %
1165: \def\makefootline{%
1166: \baselineskip24pt
1167: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1168: }
1169: %
1170: \def\makeheadline{%
1171: \vbox to 0pt{%
1172: \vskip-22.5pt
1173: \line{%
1174: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1175: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1176: \getcolormarks
1177: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1178: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1179: }%
1180: \vss
1181: }%
1182: \nointerlineskip
1183: }
1184: %
1185: %
1186: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1187: %
1188: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1189: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1190: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1191: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1192: %
1193: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1194: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1195: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1196: % bitmap.
1197: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1198: \begingroup
1199: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1200: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1201: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1202: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1203: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1204: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1205: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1206: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1207: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1208: \fi
1209: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1210: \fi
1211: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1212: \fi
1213: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1214: \fi
1215: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1216: \fi
1217: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1218: \fi
1219: \closein 1
1220: \endgroup
1221: %
1222: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1223: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1224: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1225: \immediate\pdfimage
1226: \else
1227: \immediate\pdfximage
1228: \fi
1229: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
1230: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
1231: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1232: #1.\pdfimgext
1233: \else
1234: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1235: \fi
1236: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1237: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1238: \fi}
1239: %
1240: \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1241: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1242: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1243: \indexnofonts
1244: \turnoffactive
1245: \makevalueexpandable
1246: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1247: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1248: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1249: }}
1250: %
1251: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1252: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1253: %
1254: % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
1255: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
1256: \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1257: \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1258: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1259: %
1260: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1261: % come from Petr Olsak
1262: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1263: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1264: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1265: \advance\tempnum by 1
1266: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1267: %
1268: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1269: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1270: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1271: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1272: % #4 is the page number
1273: %
1274: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1275: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1276: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1277: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1278: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1279: \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1280: \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1281: \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1282: \else
1283: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
1284: \fi
1285: %
1286: % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
1287: \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1288: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1289: %
1290: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1291: }
1292: %
1293: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1294: \begingroup
1295: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1296: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1297: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1298: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1299: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1300: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1301: }%
1302: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1303: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1304: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1305: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1306: }%
1307: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1308: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1309: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1310: }%
1311: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1312: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1313: }%
1314: \def\thischapnum{0}%
1315: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1316: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1317: %
1318: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1319: % al. a second time, below.
1320: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1321: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1322: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1323: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1324: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1325: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1326: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1327: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1328: \readdatafile{toc}%
1329: %
1330: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1331: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1332: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1333: %
1334: % We use the node names as the destinations.
1335: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1336: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1337: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1338: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1339: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1340: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1341: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1342: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1343: %
1344: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1345: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1346: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1347: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1348: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1349: %
1350: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1351: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
1352: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
1353: % we use for the index sort strings.
1354: %
1355: \indexnofonts
1356: \setupdatafile
1357: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1358: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1359: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1360: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1361: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1362: \input \tocreadfilename
1363: \endgroup
1364: }
1365: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1366: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1367: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1368: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1369: ]
1370: %
1371: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1372: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1373: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1374: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1375: \advance\filenamelength by 1
1376: \fi
1377: \nextsp}
1378: \def\getfilename#1{%
1379: \filenamelength=0
1380: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1381: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1382: \edef\temp{#1}%
1383: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1384: }
1385: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1386: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1387: \else
1388: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1389: \fi
1390: % make a live url in pdf output.
1391: \def\pdfurl#1{%
1392: \begingroup
1393: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1394: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1395: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1396: % people have actually reported a problem with.
1397: %
1398: \normalturnoffactive
1399: \def\@{@}%
1400: \let\/=\empty
1401: \makevalueexpandable
1402: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1403: % special-casing \var here?
1404: \def\var##1{##1}%
1405: %
1406: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1407: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1408: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1409: \endgroup}
1410: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1411: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1412: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1413: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1414: \def\maketoks{%
1415: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1416: \ifx\first0\adn0
1417: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1418: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1419: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1420: \else
1421: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1422: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1423: \let\next=\maketoks
1424: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1425: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1426: \fi
1427: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1428: \next}
1429: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1430: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1431: \def\pdflink#1{%
1432: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1433: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1434: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1435: \else
1436: % non-pdf mode
1437: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1438: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1439: \let\endlink = \relax
1440: \let\setcolor = \gobble
1441: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1442: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1443: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1444:
1445:
1446: \message{fonts,}
1447:
1448: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1449: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1450: % italics, not bold italics.
1451: %
1452: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
1453: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1454: \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
1455: }
1456:
1457: % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1458: %
1459: \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1460:
1461: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1462: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1463: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1464: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1465: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1466:
1467: % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1468: % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
1469: \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
1470:
1471: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1472: % So we set up a \sf.
1473: \newfam\sffam
1474: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1475: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1476:
1477: % We don't need math for this font style.
1478: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1479:
1480:
1481: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1482: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1483: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1484: %
1485: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1486: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1487: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1488: %
1489: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1490: \def\baselinefactor{1}
1491: %
1492: \newdimen\textleading
1493: \def\setleading#1{%
1494: \dimen0 = #1\relax
1495: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1496: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1497: \normalbaselines
1498: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1499: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1500: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1501: }%
1502: }
1503:
1504: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1505: %
1506: % do nothing with this by default.
1507: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1508: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1509: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1510:
1511: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1512: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1513: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1514: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1515: \begingroup
1516: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1517: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1518: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1519: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1520: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1521: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1522: %%Version: 1.000
1523: %%EndComments
1524: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1525: 12 dict begin
1526: begincmap
1527: /CIDSystemInfo
1528: << /Registry (TeX)
1529: /Ordering (OT1)
1530: /Supplement 0
1531: >> def
1532: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1533: /CMapType 2 def
1534: 1 begincodespacerange
1535: <00> <7F>
1536: endcodespacerange
1537: 8 beginbfrange
1538: <00> <01> <0393>
1539: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1540: <23> <26> <0023>
1541: <28> <3B> <0028>
1542: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1543: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1544: <61> <7A> <0061>
1545: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1546: endbfrange
1547: 40 beginbfchar
1548: <02> <0398>
1549: <03> <039B>
1550: <04> <039E>
1551: <05> <03A0>
1552: <06> <03A3>
1553: <07> <03D2>
1554: <08> <03A6>
1555: <0B> <00660066>
1556: <0C> <00660069>
1557: <0D> <0066006C>
1558: <0E> <006600660069>
1559: <0F> <00660066006C>
1560: <10> <0131>
1561: <11> <0237>
1562: <12> <0060>
1563: <13> <00B4>
1564: <14> <02C7>
1565: <15> <02D8>
1566: <16> <00AF>
1567: <17> <02DA>
1568: <18> <00B8>
1569: <19> <00DF>
1570: <1A> <00E6>
1571: <1B> <0153>
1572: <1C> <00F8>
1573: <1D> <00C6>
1574: <1E> <0152>
1575: <1F> <00D8>
1576: <21> <0021>
1577: <22> <201D>
1578: <27> <2019>
1579: <3C> <00A1>
1580: <3D> <003D>
1581: <3E> <00BF>
1582: <5C> <201C>
1583: <5F> <02D9>
1584: <60> <2018>
1585: <7D> <02DD>
1586: <7E> <007E>
1587: <7F> <00A8>
1588: endbfchar
1589: endcmap
1590: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1591: end
1592: end
1593: %%EndResource
1594: %%EOF
1595: }\endgroup
1596: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1597: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1598: }%
1599: %
1600: % \cmapOT1IT
1601: \begingroup
1602: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1603: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1604: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1605: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1606: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1607: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1608: %%Version: 1.000
1609: %%EndComments
1610: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1611: 12 dict begin
1612: begincmap
1613: /CIDSystemInfo
1614: << /Registry (TeX)
1615: /Ordering (OT1IT)
1616: /Supplement 0
1617: >> def
1618: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1619: /CMapType 2 def
1620: 1 begincodespacerange
1621: <00> <7F>
1622: endcodespacerange
1623: 8 beginbfrange
1624: <00> <01> <0393>
1625: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1626: <25> <26> <0025>
1627: <28> <3B> <0028>
1628: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1629: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1630: <61> <7A> <0061>
1631: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1632: endbfrange
1633: 42 beginbfchar
1634: <02> <0398>
1635: <03> <039B>
1636: <04> <039E>
1637: <05> <03A0>
1638: <06> <03A3>
1639: <07> <03D2>
1640: <08> <03A6>
1641: <0B> <00660066>
1642: <0C> <00660069>
1643: <0D> <0066006C>
1644: <0E> <006600660069>
1645: <0F> <00660066006C>
1646: <10> <0131>
1647: <11> <0237>
1648: <12> <0060>
1649: <13> <00B4>
1650: <14> <02C7>
1651: <15> <02D8>
1652: <16> <00AF>
1653: <17> <02DA>
1654: <18> <00B8>
1655: <19> <00DF>
1656: <1A> <00E6>
1657: <1B> <0153>
1658: <1C> <00F8>
1659: <1D> <00C6>
1660: <1E> <0152>
1661: <1F> <00D8>
1662: <21> <0021>
1663: <22> <201D>
1664: <23> <0023>
1665: <24> <00A3>
1666: <27> <2019>
1667: <3C> <00A1>
1668: <3D> <003D>
1669: <3E> <00BF>
1670: <5C> <201C>
1671: <5F> <02D9>
1672: <60> <2018>
1673: <7D> <02DD>
1674: <7E> <007E>
1675: <7F> <00A8>
1676: endbfchar
1677: endcmap
1678: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1679: end
1680: end
1681: %%EndResource
1682: %%EOF
1683: }\endgroup
1684: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
1685: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1686: }%
1687: %
1688: % \cmapOT1TT
1689: \begingroup
1690: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1691: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1692: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1693: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1694: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1695: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1696: %%Version: 1.000
1697: %%EndComments
1698: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1699: 12 dict begin
1700: begincmap
1701: /CIDSystemInfo
1702: << /Registry (TeX)
1703: /Ordering (OT1TT)
1704: /Supplement 0
1705: >> def
1706: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
1707: /CMapType 2 def
1708: 1 begincodespacerange
1709: <00> <7F>
1710: endcodespacerange
1711: 5 beginbfrange
1712: <00> <01> <0393>
1713: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1714: <21> <26> <0021>
1715: <28> <5F> <0028>
1716: <61> <7E> <0061>
1717: endbfrange
1718: 32 beginbfchar
1719: <02> <0398>
1720: <03> <039B>
1721: <04> <039E>
1722: <05> <03A0>
1723: <06> <03A3>
1724: <07> <03D2>
1725: <08> <03A6>
1726: <0B> <2191>
1727: <0C> <2193>
1728: <0D> <0027>
1729: <0E> <00A1>
1730: <0F> <00BF>
1731: <10> <0131>
1732: <11> <0237>
1733: <12> <0060>
1734: <13> <00B4>
1735: <14> <02C7>
1736: <15> <02D8>
1737: <16> <00AF>
1738: <17> <02DA>
1739: <18> <00B8>
1740: <19> <00DF>
1741: <1A> <00E6>
1742: <1B> <0153>
1743: <1C> <00F8>
1744: <1D> <00C6>
1745: <1E> <0152>
1746: <1F> <00D8>
1747: <20> <2423>
1748: <27> <2019>
1749: <60> <2018>
1750: <7F> <00A8>
1751: endbfchar
1752: endcmap
1753: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1754: end
1755: end
1756: %%EndResource
1757: %%EOF
1758: }\endgroup
1759: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
1760: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1761: }%
1762: \fi\fi
1763:
1764:
1765: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
1766: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1767: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
1768: % Example:
1769: % #1 = \textrm
1770: % #2 = \rmshape
1771: % #3 = 10
1772: % #4 = \mainmagstep
1773: % #5 = OT1
1774: %
1775: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1776: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
1777: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
1778: }
1779: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1780: \let\cmap\gobble
1781: %
1782: % (end of cmaps)
1783:
1784: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1785: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1786: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1787: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
1788: \def\fontprefix{cm}
1789: \fi
1790: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1791: \def\rmshape{r}
1792: \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
1793: \def\bfshape{b}
1794: \def\bxshape{bx}
1795: \def\ttshape{tt}
1796: \def\ttbshape{tt}
1797: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
1798: \def\itshape{ti}
1799: \def\itbshape{bxti}
1800: \def\slshape{sl}
1801: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
1802: \def\sfshape{ss}
1803: \def\sfbshape{ss}
1804: \def\scshape{csc}
1805: \def\scbshape{csc}
1806:
1807: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
1808: %
1809: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1810: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1811: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1812: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1813: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1814: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1815: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1816: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1817: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1818: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1819: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1820: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1821: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1822: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1823: \def\textecsize{1095}
1824:
1825: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1826: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1827: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1828: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1829: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1830:
1831: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1832: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1833: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1834: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1835: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1836: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1837: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1838: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1839: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1840: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1841: \font\smalli=cmmi9
1842: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1843: \def\smallecsize{0900}
1844:
1845: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1846: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1847: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1848: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1849: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1850: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1851: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1852: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1853: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1854: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1855: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1856: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1857: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1858:
1859: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1860: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1861: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1862: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1863: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1864: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1865: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1866: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1867: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1868: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1869: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1870: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1871: \def\titleecsize{2074}
1872:
1873: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1874: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1875: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1876: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
1877: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1878: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1879: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1880: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
1881: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
1882: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1883: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1884: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1885: \def\chapecsize{1728}
1886:
1887: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
1888: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1889: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1890: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
1891: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1892: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1893: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1894: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1895: \let\secbf\secrm
1896: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1897: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1898: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1899: \def\sececsize{1440}
1900:
1901: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1902: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1903: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1904: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
1905: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1906: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1907: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
1908: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1909: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1910: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1911: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1912: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1913: \def\ssececsize{1200}
1914:
1915: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1916: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1917: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1918: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1919: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1920: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
1921: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1922: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1923: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1924: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1925: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
1926: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1927: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
1928:
1929: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
1930: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
1931: \rm
1932: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
1933:
1934:
1935: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
1936: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
1937: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
1938: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
1939: %
1940: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
1941: % Text fonts (10pt).
1942: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
1943: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
1944: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1945: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1946: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1947: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1948: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1949: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1950: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1951: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1952: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1953: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1954: \def\textecsize{1000}
1955:
1956: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1957: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1958: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1959: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1960: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1961:
1962: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1963: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1964: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1965: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1966: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1967: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1968: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1969: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1970: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1971: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1972: \font\smalli=cmmi9
1973: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1974: \def\smallecsize{0900}
1975:
1976: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1977: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1978: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1979: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1980: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1981: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1982: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1983: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1984: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1985: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1986: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1987: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1988: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
1989:
1990: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1991: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1992: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1993: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1994: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1995: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1996: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1997: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1998: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1999: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2000: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
2001: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
2002: \def\titleecsize{2074}
2003:
2004: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2005: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2006: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2007: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2008: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2009: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2010: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2011: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2012: \let\chapbf\chaprm
2013: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2014: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2015: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2016: \def\chapecsize{1440}
2017:
2018: % Section fonts (12pt).
2019: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2020: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2021: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2022: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2023: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2024: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2025: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2026: \let\secbf\secrm
2027: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2028: \font\seci=cmmi12
2029: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2030: \def\sececsize{1200}
2031:
2032: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
2033: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2034: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2035: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2036: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2037: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2038: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2039: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2040: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2041: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2042: \font\sseci=cmmi10
2043: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
2044: \def\ssececsize{1000}
2045:
2046: % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2047: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2048: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2049: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2050: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2051: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2052: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2053: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2054: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2055: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2056: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
2057: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2058: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
2059:
2060: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
2061: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
2062: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2063: \rm
2064: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
2065:
2066:
2067: % We provide the user-level command
2068: % @fonttextsize 10
2069: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
2070: %
2071: \def\xiword{11}
2072: \def\xword{10}
2073: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
2074: %
2075: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2076: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2077: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2078: %
2079: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2080: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2081: %
2082: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2083: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2084: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2085: \else
2086: \errhelp=\EMsimple
2087: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2088: \fi\fi
2089: \endgroup
2090: }
2091:
2092:
2093: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2094: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
2095: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
2096: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
2097: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2098: %
2099: \def\resetmathfonts{%
2100: \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
2101: \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
2102: \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2103: }
2104:
2105: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2106: % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2107: % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2108: % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2109: %
2110: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2111: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
2112: % the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2113: %
2114: % This all needs generalizing, badly.
2115: %
2116: \def\textfonts{%
2117: \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
2118: \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2119: \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
2120: \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2121: \def\curfontsize{text}%
2122: \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2123: \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2124: \def\titlefonts{%
2125: \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
2126: \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
2127: \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
2128: \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2129: \def\curfontsize{title}%
2130: \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2131: \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
2132: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2133: \def\chapfonts{%
2134: \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
2135: \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2136: \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
2137: \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
2138: \def\curfontsize{chap}%
2139: \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2140: \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
2141: \def\secfonts{%
2142: \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
2143: \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2144: \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
2145: \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2146: \def\curfontsize{sec}%
2147: \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2148: \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
2149: \def\subsecfonts{%
2150: \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
2151: \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2152: \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
2153: \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2154: \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2155: \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2156: \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2157: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
2158: \def\reducedfonts{%
2159: \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
2160: \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
2161: \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
2162: \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2163: \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2164: \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2165: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2166: \def\smallfonts{%
2167: \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
2168: \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
2169: \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
2170: \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2171: \def\curfontsize{small}%
2172: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2173: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2174: \def\smallerfonts{%
2175: \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
2176: \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
2177: \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
2178: \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2179: \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2180: \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2181: \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
2182:
2183: % Fonts for short table of contents.
2184: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2185: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
2186: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2187: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2188:
2189: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2190: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2191: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2192:
2193: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2194: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2195:
2196: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2197: % can fit this many characters:
2198: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
2199: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2200: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
2201: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2202: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
2203: %
2204: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2205: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
2206: % --karl, 24jan03.
2207:
2208: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2209: %
2210: \definetextfontsizexi
2211:
2212:
2213: \message{markup,}
2214:
2215: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2216: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2217: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2218: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
2219: %
2220: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2221:
2222: % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2223: % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2224: % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2225: % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2226: % currently in effect.
2227: \newif\ifmarkupvar
2228: \newif\ifmarkupsamp
2229: \newif\ifmarkupkey
2230: %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2231: %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2232: \newif\ifmarkupcode
2233: \newif\ifmarkupkbd
2234: %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2235: %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2236: \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2237: \newif\ifmarkupexample
2238: \newif\ifmarkupverb
2239: \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2240:
2241: \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2242:
2243: \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2244: \csname markup#1true\endcsname
2245: \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2246: \markupstylesetup
2247: }
2248:
2249: \let\markupstylesetup\empty
2250:
2251: \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2252: \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2253: \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2254: \def#1%
2255: }
2256:
2257: % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2258: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2259: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2260: \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2261: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2262: }
2263:
2264: \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2265: \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2266: \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2267: \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2268: }
2269:
2270: {
2271: \catcode`\'=\active
2272: \catcode`\`=\active
2273:
2274: \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
2275: \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
2276:
2277: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
2278: \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
2279: }
2280:
2281: \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2282: \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2283: %
2284: \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2285: \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2286: %
2287: \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
2288: \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
2289: %
2290: \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
2291: \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
2292: %
2293: \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2294: \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2295: %
2296: \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2297: \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2298:
2299: % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
2300: % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
2301: % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
2302: % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
2303: % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
2304: %
2305: \def\codequoteright{%
2306: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2307: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2308: '%
2309: \else \char'15 \fi
2310: \else \char'15 \fi
2311: }
2312: %
2313: % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2314: % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2315: % the code environments to do likewise.
2316: %
2317: \def\codequoteleft{%
2318: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2319: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2320: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2321: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2322: \relax`%
2323: \else \char'22 \fi
2324: \else \char'22 \fi
2325: }
2326:
2327: % Commands to set the quote options.
2328: %
2329: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2330: \def\temp{#1}%
2331: \ifx\temp\onword
2332: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2333: = t%
2334: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2335: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2336: = \relax
2337: \else
2338: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2339: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2340: \fi\fi
2341: }
2342: %
2343: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2344: \def\temp{#1}%
2345: \ifx\temp\onword
2346: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2347: = t%
2348: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2349: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2350: = \relax
2351: \else
2352: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2353: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2354: \fi\fi
2355: }
2356:
2357: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2358: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2359:
2360: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2361: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2362:
2363: % Font commands.
2364:
2365: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2366: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2367: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2368: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2369: \ifusingtt
2370: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
2371: {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2372: \next
2373: }
2374: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2375: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2376:
2377: % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
2378: % character) is such as not to need one.
2379: \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
2380: \ifx\next,%
2381: \else\ifx\next-%
2382: \else\ifx\next.%
2383: \else\ifx\next\.%
2384: \else\ifx\next\comma%
2385: \else\ptexslash
2386: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
2387: \aftersmartic
2388: }
2389:
2390: % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
2391: \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
2392:
2393: % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
2394: % ttsl for book titles, do we?
2395: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
2396:
2397: \def\aftersmartic{}
2398: \def\var#1{%
2399: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
2400: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
2401: \smartslanted{#1}%
2402: }
2403:
2404: \let\i=\smartitalic
2405: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
2406: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
2407: \let\emph=\smartitalic
2408:
2409: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2410: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
2411: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2412: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2413:
2414: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
2415: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2416: \let\strong=\b
2417:
2418: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2419: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2420:
2421: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2422: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2423: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2424: %
2425: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2426: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2427:
2428: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2429: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2430: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2431: %
2432: \catcode`@=11
2433: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2434: \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2435: \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2436: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2437: }
2438: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2439: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2440: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2441: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2442: }
2443: \catcode`@=\other
2444: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2445:
2446: % @t, explicit typewriter.
2447: \def\t#1{%
2448: {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2449: \null
2450: }
2451:
2452: % @samp.
2453: \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2454:
2455: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
2456: \let\indicateurl=\samp
2457:
2458: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
2459: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
2460: % This is a subroutine for that.
2461: \def\tclose#1{%
2462: {%
2463: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2464: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2465: %
2466: % Switch to typewriter.
2467: \tt
2468: %
2469: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2470: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2471: %
2472: % Turn off hyphenation.
2473: \nohyphenation
2474: %
2475: \rawbackslash
2476: \plainfrenchspacing
2477: #1%
2478: }%
2479: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2480: }
2481:
2482: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2483: % (But see \codedashfinish below.)
2484: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2485: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2486: %
2487: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2488: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2489: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2490: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
2491: {
2492: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2493: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2494: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
2495: %
2496: \global\def\code{\begingroup
2497: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2498: % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2499: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
2500: \ifallowcodebreaks
2501: \let-\codedash
2502: \let_\codeunder
2503: \else
2504: \let-\normaldash
2505: \let_\realunder
2506: \fi
2507: % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
2508: % after the hyphen.
2509: \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
2510: %
2511: \codex
2512: }
2513: %
2514: \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
2515: \gdef\codedashfinish{%
2516: \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
2517: %
2518: % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
2519: % (a) the next character is a -, or
2520: % (b) the preceding character is a -.
2521: % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
2522: % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
2523: \ifx\next\codedash \else
2524: \ifx\codedashprev\codedash
2525: \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
2526: \fi
2527: % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
2528: % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
2529: \global\let\codedashprev= \next
2530: }
2531: }
2532: \def\normaldash{-}
2533: %
2534: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2535:
2536: \def\codeunder{%
2537: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2538: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2539: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2540: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2541: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2542: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2543: \else\normalunderscore \fi
2544: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2545: {\_}%
2546: }
2547:
2548: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2549: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
2550: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
2551: % and _ on and off.
2552: %
2553: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2554:
2555: \def\keywordtrue{true}
2556: \def\keywordfalse{false}
2557:
2558: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2559: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2560: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2561: \allowcodebreakstrue
2562: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2563: \allowcodebreaksfalse
2564: \else
2565: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2566: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
2567: \fi\fi
2568: }
2569:
2570: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
2571: % so use \code rather than \samp.
2572: \let\command=\code
2573: \let\env=\code
2574: \let\file=\code
2575: \let\option=\code
2576:
2577: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2578: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2579: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2580: % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2581: % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
2582: % for comparison.)
2583: \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
2584: \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2585: \unsepspaces
2586: \pdfurl{#1}%
2587: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2588: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2589: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2590: \else
2591: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2592: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2593: \ifpdf
2594: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2595: \else
2596: \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2597: \fi
2598: \else
2599: \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2600: \fi
2601: \fi
2602: \endlink
2603: \endgroup}
2604:
2605: % This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
2606: \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
2607: \let\uref=\urefbreak
2608: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
2609: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
2610: \unsepspaces
2611: \pdfurl{#1}%
2612: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2613: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2614: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2615: \else
2616: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2617: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2618: \ifpdf
2619: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2620: \else
2621: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2622: \fi
2623: \else
2624: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
2625: \fi
2626: \fi
2627: \endlink
2628: \endgroup}
2629:
2630: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
2631: \def\urefcatcodes{%
2632: \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
2633: \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
2634: \catcode\slashChar=\active
2635: }
2636: {
2637: \urefcatcodes
2638: %
2639: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
2640: \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2641: \urefcatcodes
2642: \let&\urefcodeamp
2643: \let.\urefcodedot
2644: \let#\urefcodehash
2645: \let?\urefcodequest
2646: \let/\urefcodeslash
2647: \codex
2648: }
2649: %
2650: % By default, they are just regular characters.
2651: \global\def&{\normalamp}
2652: \global\def.{\normaldot}
2653: \global\def#{\normalhash}
2654: \global\def?{\normalquest}
2655: \global\def/{\normalslash}
2656: }
2657:
2658: % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
2659: % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
2660: % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
2661: \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
2662: \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
2663: %
2664: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
2665: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
2666: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
2667: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
2668: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
2669: {
2670: \catcode`\/=\active
2671: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
2672: \urefprestretch \slashChar
2673: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
2674: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
2675: \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
2676: }
2677: }
2678:
2679: % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
2680: % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
2681: % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
2682: %
2683: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
2684: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2685: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
2686: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2687: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
2688: \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2689: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
2690: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
2691: \else
2692: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2693: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2694: \fi\fi\fi
2695: }
2696: \def\wordafter{after}
2697: \def\wordbefore{before}
2698: \def\wordnone{none}
2699:
2700: \urefbreakstyle after
2701:
2702: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2703: %
2704: \let\url=\uref
2705:
2706: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2707: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2708: %
2709: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2710: \ifpdf
2711: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2712: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2713: \unsepspaces
2714: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2715: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2716: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2717: \endlink
2718: \endgroup}
2719: \else
2720: \let\email=\uref
2721: \fi
2722:
2723: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2724: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2725: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2726: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2727: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2728: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2729: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2730: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2731: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2732: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2733: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2734: \else
2735: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2736: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2737: \fi\fi\fi
2738: }
2739: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
2740: \def\wordexample{example}
2741: \def\wordcode{code}
2742:
2743: % Default is `distinct'.
2744: \kbdinputstyle distinct
2745:
2746: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2747: % then @kbd has no effect.
2748: \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
2749:
2750: \def\xkey{\key}
2751: \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
2752: \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2753: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2754: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2755: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2756: }
2757:
2758: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
2759: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2760: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
2761: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2762: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2763: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2764: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2765: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2766: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2767:
2768: % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
2769: % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
2770: % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2771: %
2772: \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
2773: \nohyphenation
2774: \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2775: #1}\null}
2776:
2777: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2778: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2779:
2780: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
2781: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2782: \def\click{\arrow}
2783:
2784: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
2785: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2786: %
2787: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2788:
2789: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2790: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
2791: % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
2792: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2793:
2794: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2795: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2796: % all-uppercase.
2797: %
2798: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2799: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2800: {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2801: \def\temp{#2}%
2802: \ifx\temp\empty \else
2803: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2804: \fi
2805: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2806: }
2807:
2808: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2809: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2810: %
2811: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2812: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2813: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2814: \def\temp{#2}%
2815: \ifx\temp\empty \else
2816: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2817: \fi
2818: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2819: }
2820:
2821: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
2822: %
2823: \def\asis#1{#1}
2824:
2825: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2826: %
2827: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
2828: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
2829: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
2830: % which is what @var uses.
2831: {
2832: \catcode`\_ = \active
2833: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
2834: \catcode`\_=\active
2835: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
2836: }
2837: }
2838: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
2839: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
2840: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
2841: %
2842: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
2843: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
2844: %
2845: \def\math{%
2846: \tex
2847: \mathunderscore
2848: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
2849: \mathactive
2850: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
2851: \let\"=\ddot
2852: \let\'=\acute
2853: \let\==\bar
2854: \let\^=\hat
2855: \let\`=\grave
2856: \let\u=\breve
2857: \let\v=\check
2858: \let\~=\tilde
2859: \let\dotaccent=\dot
2860: $\finishmath
2861: }
2862: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
2863:
2864: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
2865: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
2866: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
2867: %
2868: {
2869: \catcode`^ = \active
2870: \catcode`< = \active
2871: \catcode`> = \active
2872: \catcode`+ = \active
2873: \catcode`' = \active
2874: \gdef\mathactive{%
2875: \let^ = \ptexhat
2876: \let< = \ptexless
2877: \let> = \ptexgtr
2878: \let+ = \ptexplus
2879: \let' = \ptexquoteright
2880: }
2881: }
2882:
2883: % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
2884: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2885:
2886: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
2887: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
2888: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
2889: %
2890: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
2891: %
2892: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
2893: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
2894: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
2895: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2896: }
2897: %
2898: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
2899: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
2900: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
2901: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
2902: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
2903: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
2904: }
2905: %
2906: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
2907: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
2908: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
2909: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
2910: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
2911: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
2912: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
2913: %
2914: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
2915: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
2916: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
2917: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
2918: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2919: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
2920: }
2921:
2922: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
2923: %
2924: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
2925: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
2926: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
2927: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
2928: \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
2929: }
2930:
2931: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
2932: %
2933: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
2934: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
2935: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
2936: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
2937: }
2938:
2939:
2940: \message{glyphs,}
2941: % and logos.
2942:
2943: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
2944: \def\@{\char64 }
2945: \let\atchar=\@
2946:
2947: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
2948: % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
2949: % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
2950: \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
2951: \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
2952: \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
2953: \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
2954: \begingroup
2955: % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
2956: % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
2957: \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
2958: \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
2959: \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
2960: !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
2961: !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
2962: !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
2963: !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
2964: !endgroup
2965:
2966: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
2967: \let\comma = ,
2968:
2969: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
2970: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
2971: \let\, = \ptexc
2972: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
2973: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
2974: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
2975: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
2976: \let\udotaccent = \d
2977:
2978: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
2979: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
2980: \def\questiondown{?`}
2981: \def\exclamdown{!`}
2982: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
2983: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
2984:
2985: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
2986: \def\imacro{i}
2987: \def\jmacro{j}
2988: \def\dotless#1{%
2989: \def\temp{#1}%
2990: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
2991: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
2992: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
2993: \fi\fi
2994: }
2995:
2996: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
2997: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
2998: %
2999: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
3000:
3001: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
3002: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
3003: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
3004: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
3005: % \scriptscriptstyle).
3006: %
3007: \def\LaTeX{%
3008: L\kern-.36em
3009: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
3010: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
3011: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
3012: % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
3013: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
3014: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
3015: \else
3016: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
3017: \selectfonts\lllsize A%
3018: \fi
3019: }%
3020: \vss
3021: }}%
3022: \kern-.15em
3023: \TeX
3024: }
3025:
3026: % Some math mode symbols.
3027: \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
3028: \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
3029: \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
3030: \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
3031:
3032: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
3033: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
3034: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
3035: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
3036: % whichever is larger.
3037: %
3038: \def\dots{%
3039: \leavevmode
3040: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
3041: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
3042: \dimen0 = \wd0
3043: \else
3044: \dimen0 = 1.5em
3045: \fi
3046: \hbox to \dimen0{%
3047: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
3048: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3049: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3050: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
3051: }%
3052: }
3053:
3054: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
3055: %
3056: \def\enddots{%
3057: \dots
3058: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
3059: }
3060:
3061: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3062: %
3063: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3064: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3065: %
3066: \def\point{$\star$}
3067: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
3068: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
3069: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
3070: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
3071: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
3072:
3073: % The @error{} command.
3074: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3075: %
3076: \newbox\errorbox
3077: %
3078: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
3079: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
3080: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3081: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
3082: %
3083: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
3084: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
3085: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
3086: \vbox{%
3087: \hrule height\dimen2
3088: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
3089: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
3090: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
3091: \hrule height\dimen2}
3092: \hfil}
3093: %
3094: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
3095:
3096: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3097: %
3098: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
3099:
3100: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3101: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3102: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3103: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3104: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3105: %
3106: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3107: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3108: % font height.
3109: %
3110: % feymr - regular
3111: % feymo - slanted
3112: % feybr - bold
3113: % feybo - bold slanted
3114: %
3115: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3116: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3117: % Hmm.
3118: %
3119: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3120: % Hope not.
3121: %
3122: %
3123: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
3124: \def\eurofont{%
3125: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3126: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3127: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3128: % font installed.
3129: %
3130: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3131: % that to the current nominal size.
3132: %
3133: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3134: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3135: %
3136: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3137: %
3138: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3139: % bold:
3140: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
3141: \else
3142: % regular:
3143: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
3144: \fi
3145: \thiseurofont
3146: }
3147:
3148: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3149: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3150: % the redefinition.
3151: %
3152: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3153: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
3154: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
3155: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
3156: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
3157: %
3158: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
3159: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3160: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
3161: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3162: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
3163: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
3164: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
3165: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
3166: %
3167: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3168: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
3169: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3170: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3171: %
3172: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3173: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3174: % the same EC font.
3175: \def\ogonek#1{{%
3176: \def\temp{#1}%
3177: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3178: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3179: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3180: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3181: \else
3182: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
3183: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
3184: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
3185: \fi
3186: \fi\fi\fi\fi
3187: }%
3188: }
3189: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
3190: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
3191: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
3192: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
3193: %
3194: % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
3195: \def\ecfont{%
3196: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3197: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3198: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3199: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3200: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
3201: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3202: \ifmonospace
3203: % typewriter:
3204: \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3205: \else
3206: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3207: % bold:
3208: \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3209: \else
3210: % regular:
3211: \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3212: \fi
3213: \fi
3214: \thisecfont
3215: }
3216:
3217: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
3218: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3219: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3220: %
3221: \def\registeredsymbol{%
3222: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
3223: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
3224: }$%
3225: }
3226:
3227: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3228: %
3229: \def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
3230:
3231: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3232: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
3233: % so we'll define it if necessary.
3234: %
3235: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3236: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3237: \fi
3238:
3239: % Quotes.
3240: \chardef\quotedblleft="5C
3241: \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3242: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3243: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
3244:
3245:
3246: \message{page headings,}
3247:
3248: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3249: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3250:
3251: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3252: \newif\ifseenauthor
3253: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3254:
3255: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3256: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3257: %
3258: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3259: \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3260: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3261: \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3262:
3263: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3264: \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3265: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3266:
3267: \envdef\titlepage{%
3268: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3269: \begingroup
3270: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3271: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3272: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3273: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3274: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3275: %
3276: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3277: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3278: \let\oldpage = \page
3279: \def\page{%
3280: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3281: \finishtitlepage
3282: \fi
3283: \let\page = \oldpage
3284: \page
3285: \null
3286: }%
3287: }
3288:
3289: \def\Etitlepage{%
3290: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3291: \finishtitlepage
3292: \fi
3293: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3294: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3295: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3296: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3297: \oldpage
3298: \endgroup
3299: %
3300: % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3301: % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3302: \HEADINGSon
3303: %
3304: % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3305: \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3306: \shortcontents
3307: \contents
3308: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3309: \global\let\contents = \relax
3310: \fi
3311: %
3312: \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3313: \contents
3314: \global\let\contents = \relax
3315: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3316: \fi
3317: }
3318:
3319: \def\finishtitlepage{%
3320: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3321: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3322: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3323: }
3324:
3325: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
3326: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
3327: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
3328: % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par
3329: % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
3330: %
3331: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
3332: \rmisbold
3333: \hyphenpenalty=10000
3334: \parindent=0pt
3335: \tolerance=5000
3336: \ptexraggedright
3337: }
3338:
3339: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3340:
3341: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
3342: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3343:
3344: \parseargdef\title{%
3345: \checkenv\titlepage
3346: \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
3347: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3348: \finishedtitlepagefalse
3349: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3350: }
3351:
3352: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
3353: \checkenv\titlepage
3354: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3355: }
3356:
3357: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
3358: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
3359: %
3360: \parseargdef\author{%
3361: \def\temp{\quotation}%
3362: \ifx\thisenv\temp
3363: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3364: \else
3365: \checkenv\titlepage
3366: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3367: {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3368: \fi
3369: }
3370:
3371:
3372: % Set up page headings and footings.
3373:
3374: \let\thispage=\folio
3375:
3376: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
3377: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
3378: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
3379: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
3380:
3381: % Now make TeX use those variables
3382: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3383: \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3384: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3385: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3386: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3387:
3388: % Commands to set those variables.
3389: % For example, this is what @headings on does
3390: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3391: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3392: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
3393: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3394:
3395:
3396: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3397: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3398: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3399: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3400:
3401: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3402: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3403: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3404: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3405:
3406: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3407:
3408: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3409: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3410: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3411: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3412:
3413: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3414: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3415: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3416: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3417: %
3418: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
3419: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3420: \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
3421: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3422: }
3423:
3424: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3425:
3426: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3427: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3428: %
3429: % The same set of arguments for:
3430: %
3431: % @oddheadingmarks
3432: % @evenfootingmarks
3433: % @oddfootingmarks
3434: % @everyheadingmarks
3435: % @everyfootingmarks
3436:
3437: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3438: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3439: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3440: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3441: \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3442: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3443: \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3444: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3445: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3446: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3447: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3448: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3449: }
3450:
3451: \everyheadingmarks bottom
3452: \everyfootingmarks bottom
3453:
3454: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3455: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3456: % @headings off turns them off.
3457: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3458: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3459: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3460: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3461: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3462: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3463:
3464: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3465:
3466: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3467: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
3468: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
3469: }
3470:
3471: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3472: \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
3473:
3474: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3475: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3476: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3477: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3478: % edge of all pages.
3479: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3480: \global\pageno=1
3481: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3482: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3483: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3484: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3485: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3486: }
3487: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3488:
3489: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3490: % page number on top right.
3491: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3492: \global\pageno=1
3493: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3494: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3495: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3496: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3497: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3498: }
3499: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3500:
3501: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
3502: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3503: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3504: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3505: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3506: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3507: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3508: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3509: }
3510:
3511: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
3512: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3513: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3514: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3515: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3516: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3517: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3518: }
3519:
3520: % Subroutines used in generating headings
3521: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3522: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3523: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3524: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
3525: \def\today{%
3526: \number\day\space
3527: \ifcase\month
3528: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3529: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3530: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3531: \fi
3532: \space\number\year}
3533: \fi
3534:
3535: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3536: % It generates no output of its own.
3537: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3538: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3539:
3540:
3541: \message{tables,}
3542: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3543:
3544: % default indentation of table text
3545: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
3546: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3547: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
3548: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3549: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
3550:
3551: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3552: \newdimen\itemmax
3553:
3554: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3555: % these defs.
3556: % They also define \itemindex
3557: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3558:
3559: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3560:
3561: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3562:
3563: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3564: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3565:
3566: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3567: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
3568: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
3569: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3570: \itemindex{#1}%
3571: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3572: %
3573: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3574: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3575: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3576: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3577: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3578: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
3579: %
3580: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3581: % but leave it ragged-right.
3582: \begingroup
3583: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
3584: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
3585: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
3586: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3587: \endgroup
3588: %
3589: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3590: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3591: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
3592: %
3593: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
3594: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3595: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3596: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
3597: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3598: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
3599: %
3600: \penalty 10001
3601: \endgroup
3602: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3603: \else
3604: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
3605: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3606: \noindent
3607: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3608: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3609: % eventually be printed.
3610: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
3611: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
3612: \unhbox0
3613: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3614: \endgroup
3615: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3616: \fi
3617: }
3618:
3619: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
3620: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
3621:
3622: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3623: \envdef\table{%
3624: \let\itemindex\gobble
3625: \tablecheck{table}%
3626: }
3627: \envdef\ftable{%
3628: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
3629: \tablecheck{ftable}%
3630: }
3631: \envdef\vtable{%
3632: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
3633: \tablecheck{vtable}%
3634: }
3635: \def\tablecheck#1{%
3636: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
3637: \endgroup
3638: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3639: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
3640: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3641: \else
3642: \let\next\tablex
3643: \fi
3644: \next
3645: }
3646: \def\tablex#1{%
3647: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3648: \parsearg\tabley
3649: }
3650: \def\tabley#1{%
3651: {%
3652: \makevalueexpandable
3653: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3654: \expandafter
3655: }\temp \endtablez
3656: }
3657: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3658: \aboveenvbreak
3659: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
3660: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
3661: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
3662: \itemmax=\tableindent
3663: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
3664: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
3665: \exdentamount=\tableindent
3666: \parindent = 0pt
3667: \parskip = \smallskipamount
3668: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3669: \let\item = \internalBitem
3670: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
3671: }
3672: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3673: \let\Eftable\Etable
3674: \let\Evtable\Etable
3675: \let\Eitemize\Etable
3676: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
3677:
3678: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3679:
3680: \newcount \itemno
3681:
3682: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3683:
3684: \def\doitemize#1{%
3685: \aboveenvbreak
3686: \itemmax=\itemindent
3687: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
3688: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3689: \exdentamount=\itemindent
3690: \parindent=0pt
3691: \parskip=\smallskipamount
3692: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3693: %
3694: % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
3695: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3696: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
3697: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
3698: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3699: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3700: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
3701: %
3702: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3703: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3704: %
3705: \let\item=\itemizeitem
3706: }
3707:
3708: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3709: %
3710: \def\itemizeitem{%
3711: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
3712: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3713: {%
3714: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3715: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3716: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
3717: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
3718: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3719: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3720: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
3721: % that's the theory.
3722: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
3723: \noindent
3724: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3725: %
3726: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
3727: \flushcr
3728: }
3729:
3730: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3731: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3732: %
3733: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3734:
3735: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3736: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
3737: % argument is the same as `1'.
3738: %
3739: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
3740: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3741: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3742: \def\thearg{#1}%
3743: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3744: %
3745: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
3746: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3747: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3748: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3749: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3750: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3751: \ifx\rest\empty
3752: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
3753: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3754: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3755: % not equal to itself.
3756: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3757: %
3758: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3759: % continuing to look for a <number>.
3760: %
3761: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
3762: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3763: \else
3764: % It's a letter.
3765: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
3766: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3767: \else
3768: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3769: \fi
3770: \fi
3771: \else
3772: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
3773: \numericenumerate
3774: \fi
3775: }
3776:
3777: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
3778: % given in \thearg.
3779: %
3780: \def\numericenumerate{%
3781: \itemno = \thearg
3782: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3783: }
3784:
3785: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3786: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3787: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3788: \startenumeration{%
3789: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3790: \ifnum\itemno=0
3791: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3792: alphabet}%
3793: \fi
3794: \char\lccode\itemno
3795: }%
3796: }
3797:
3798: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3799: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3800: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3801: \startenumeration{%
3802: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3803: \ifnum\itemno=0
3804: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3805: alphabet}
3806: \fi
3807: \char\uccode\itemno
3808: }%
3809: }
3810:
3811: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3812: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
3813: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3814: %
3815: \def\startenumeration#1{%
3816: \advance\itemno by -1
3817: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
3818: }
3819:
3820: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3821: % to @enumerate.
3822: %
3823: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
3824: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
3825: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3826: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3827:
3828:
3829: % @multitable macros
3830: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3831: %
3832: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3833: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
3834: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3835: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3836:
3837: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
3838:
3839: % To make preamble:
3840: %
3841: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
3842: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
3843: % @item ...
3844: %
3845: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
3846: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
3847: % columns as desired.
3848:
3849:
3850: % Or use a template:
3851: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3852: % @item ...
3853: % using the widest term desired in each column.
3854:
3855: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
3856: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
3857: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
3858: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
3859:
3860: % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
3861: % if they are.
3862:
3863: % Sample multitable:
3864:
3865: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3866: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
3867: % @item
3868: % first col stuff
3869: % @tab
3870: % second col stuff
3871: % @tab
3872: % third col
3873: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
3874: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
3875: %
3876: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
3877: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
3878: % @end multitable
3879:
3880: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
3881: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
3882: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
3883: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
3884: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
3885: % to baseline.
3886: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
3887: %
3888: \newskip\multitableparskip
3889: \newskip\multitableparindent
3890: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
3891: \newskip\multitablelinespace
3892: \multitableparskip=0pt
3893: \multitableparindent=6pt
3894: \multitablecolspace=12pt
3895: \multitablelinespace=0pt
3896:
3897: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
3898: %
3899: \let\endsetuptable\relax
3900: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
3901: \let\columnfractions\relax
3902: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
3903: \newif\ifsetpercent
3904:
3905: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
3906: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
3907: %
3908: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
3909: \global\advance\colcount by 1
3910: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
3911: \setuptable
3912: }
3913:
3914: \newcount\colcount
3915: \def\setuptable#1{%
3916: \def\firstarg{#1}%
3917: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
3918: \let\go = \relax
3919: \else
3920: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
3921: \global\setpercenttrue
3922: \else
3923: \ifsetpercent
3924: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
3925: \else
3926: \global\advance\colcount by 1
3927: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
3928: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
3929: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
3930: \fi
3931: \fi
3932: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
3933: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
3934: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
3935: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
3936: \else
3937: \let\go = \setuptable
3938: \fi%
3939: \fi
3940: \go
3941: }
3942:
3943: % multitable-only commands.
3944: %
3945: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3946: % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3947: % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
3948: % undo it ourselves.
3949: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
3950: \def\headitem{%
3951: \checkenv\multitable
3952: \crcr
3953: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
3954: \the\everytab % for the first item
3955: }%
3956: %
3957: % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
3958: % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
3959: % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
3960: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3961: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3962:
3963: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3964: %
3965: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
3966: %
3967: \envdef\multitable{%
3968: \vskip\parskip
3969: \startsavinginserts
3970: %
3971: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3972: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3973: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3974: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3975: \def\item{\crcr}%
3976: %
3977: \tolerance=9500
3978: \hbadness=9500
3979: \setmultitablespacing
3980: \parskip=\multitableparskip
3981: \parindent=\multitableparindent
3982: \overfullrule=0pt
3983: \global\colcount=0
3984: %
3985: \everycr = {%
3986: \noalign{%
3987: \global\everytab={}%
3988: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3989: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3990: \checkinserts
3991: % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3992: %\filbreak
3993: % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3994: % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
3995: % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3996: }%
3997: }%
3998: %
3999: \parsearg\domultitable
4000: }
4001: \def\domultitable#1{%
4002: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
4003: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
4004: %
4005: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
4006: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
4007: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
4008: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
4009: \halign\bgroup &%
4010: \global\advance\colcount by 1
4011: \multistrut
4012: \vtop{%
4013: % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
4014: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
4015: %
4016: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
4017: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
4018: % the first one.
4019: %
4020: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
4021: % to the width of each template entry.
4022: %
4023: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
4024: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
4025: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
4026: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
4027: %
4028: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
4029: \rightskip=0pt
4030: \ifnum\colcount=1
4031: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
4032: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
4033: \else
4034: \ifsetpercent \else
4035: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
4036: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
4037: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
4038: \fi
4039: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
4040: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
4041: \fi
4042: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
4043: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
4044: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
4045: % For example:
4046: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
4047: % @item @code{#}
4048: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
4049: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
4050: % marking characters.
4051: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
4052: }\cr
4053: }
4054: \def\Emultitable{%
4055: \crcr
4056: \egroup % end the \halign
4057: \global\setpercentfalse
4058: }
4059:
4060: \def\setmultitablespacing{%
4061: \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
4062: %
4063: % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
4064: % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
4065: % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
4066: % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
4067: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
4068: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
4069: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
4070: \fi
4071: % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
4072: % table. If not, do nothing.
4073: % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
4074: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
4075: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4076: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4077: % than skip between lines in the table.
4078: \fi%
4079: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
4080: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4081: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4082: % than skip between lines in the table.
4083: \fi}
4084:
4085:
4086: \message{conditionals,}
4087:
4088: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
4089: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
4090: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
4091: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4092: % attempt to close an environment group.
4093: %
4094: \def\makecond#1{%
4095: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
4096: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
4097: }
4098: \makecond{iftex}
4099: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
4100: \makecond{ifnothtml}
4101: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
4102: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
4103: \makecond{ifnotxml}
4104:
4105: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4106: %
4107: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
4108: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
4109: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
4110: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
4111: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
4112: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
4113: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
4114: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
4115: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
4116: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
4117: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
4118: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
4119: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
4120:
4121: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4122: %
4123: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4124: \newcount\doignorecount
4125:
4126: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4127: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4128: \obeylines
4129: \catcode`\@ = \other
4130: \catcode`\{ = \other
4131: \catcode`\} = \other
4132: %
4133: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4134: \spaceisspace
4135: %
4136: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4137: \doignorecount = 0
4138: %
4139: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4140: \dodoignore{#1}%
4141: }
4142:
4143: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4144: \obeylines %
4145: %
4146: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4147: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4148: %
4149: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4150: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
4151: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
4152: %
4153: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4154: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4155: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4156: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
4157: %
4158: % And now expand that command.
4159: \doignoretext ^^M%
4160: }%
4161: }
4162:
4163: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4164: \def\temp{#1}%
4165: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
4166: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4167: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
4168: \advance\doignorecount by 1
4169: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
4170: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4171: \fi
4172: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4173: }
4174:
4175: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4176: %
4177: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4178: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
4179: \let\next\enddoignore
4180: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
4181: \advance\doignorecount by -1
4182: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
4183: \fi
4184: \next
4185: }
4186:
4187: % Finish off ignored text.
4188: { \obeylines%
4189: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4190: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4191: % would result in a blank line in the output.
4192: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4193: }
4194:
4195:
4196: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4197: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4198: %
4199: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4200: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4201: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4202: % didn't need it.
4203: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4204: %
4205: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4206: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4207: {%
4208: \makevalueexpandable
4209: \def\temp{#2}%
4210: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
4211: \ifx\temp\empty
4212: \next{}%
4213: \else
4214: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
4215: \fi
4216: }%
4217: }
4218: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4219: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4220:
4221: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4222: %
4223: \parseargdef\clear{%
4224: {%
4225: \makevalueexpandable
4226: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
4227: }%
4228: }
4229:
4230: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4231: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4232: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4233: {
4234: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
4235: %
4236: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4237: \let\value = \expandablevalue
4238: % We don't want these characters active, ...
4239: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
4240: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4241: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4242: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4243: \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
4244: }
4245: }
4246:
4247: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
4248: % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
4249: % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
4250: % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
4251: % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
4252: % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
4253: % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
4254: %
4255: % Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
4256: % of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
4257: % dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's
4258: % been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
4259: %
4260: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
4261: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4262: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
4263: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
4264: \else
4265: \csname SET#1\endcsname
4266: \fi
4267: }
4268:
4269: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4270: % with @set.
4271: %
4272: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
4273: % \makecond and then redefine.
4274: %
4275: \makecond{ifset}
4276: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4277: \def\doifset#1#2{%
4278: {%
4279: \makevalueexpandable
4280: \let\next=\empty
4281: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4282: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4283: \fi
4284: \expandafter
4285: }\next
4286: }
4287: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4288:
4289: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
4290: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4291: %
4292: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4293: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4294: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4295: %
4296: \makecond{ifclear}
4297: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4298: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4299:
4300: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
4301: % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
4302: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
4303: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
4304: %
4305: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
4306: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
4307: %
4308: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
4309: \makevalueexpandable
4310: \let\next=\empty
4311: \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
4312: #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
4313: \fi
4314: \expandafter
4315: }\next
4316: }
4317: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
4318:
4319: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
4320: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
4321: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
4322: \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
4323: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
4324:
4325: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
4326: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
4327: \set txicommandconditionals
4328:
4329: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
4330: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
4331: \let\dircategory=\comment
4332:
4333: % @defininfoenclose.
4334: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
4335:
4336:
4337: \message{indexing,}
4338: % Index generation facilities
4339:
4340: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4341: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4342: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4343:
4344: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
4345: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
4346: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
4347: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4348: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
4349: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4350: % for the sake of vms.
4351: %
4352: \def\newindex#1{%
4353: \iflinks
4354: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4355: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
4356: \fi
4357: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
4358: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4359: }
4360:
4361: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
4362: %
4363: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4364:
4365: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4366: %
4367: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4368: %
4369: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
4370: \iflinks
4371: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4372: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
4373: \fi
4374: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4375: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4376: }
4377:
4378:
4379: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
4380: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4381: %
4382: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4383: % inside @code.
4384: %
4385: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4386: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4387:
4388: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4389: % #3 the target index (bar).
4390: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4391: % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4392: % closing the target index.
4393: \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
4394: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4395: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4396: \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
4397: \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
4398: \fi
4399: % redefine \fooindfile:
4400: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4401: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4402: % redefine \fooindex:
4403: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4404: }
4405:
4406: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
4407: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4408: % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
4409:
4410: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
4411: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
4412:
4413: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4414: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4415:
4416: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
4417: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4418:
4419: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4420: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
4421: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4422:
4423: % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4424: % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
4425: % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
4426: %
4427: \def\indexdummies{%
4428: \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
4429: \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4430: \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
4431: %
4432: % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
4433: % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
4434: % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4435: % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4436: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
4437: % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
4438: \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
4439: \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
4440: %
4441: % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
4442: % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
4443: % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
4444: % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
4445: % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
4446: % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
4447: % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
4448: % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
4449: % is still getting written without apparent harm.
4450: %
4451: % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
4452: % help-texinfo, 22may06):
4453: % @macro funindex {WORD}
4454: % @findex xyz
4455: % @end macro
4456: % ...
4457: % @funindex commtest
4458: %
4459: % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
4460: %
4461: % Sample whatsit resulting:
4462: % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
4463: %
4464: % So:
4465: \let\endinput = \empty
4466: %
4467: % Do the redefinitions.
4468: \commondummies
4469: }
4470:
4471: % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
4472: % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4473: % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
4474: % this will be simpler.
4475: %
4476: \def\atdummies{%
4477: \def\@{@@}%
4478: \def\ {@ }%
4479: \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
4480: \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
4481: %
4482: % Do the redefinitions.
4483: \commondummies
4484: \otherbackslash
4485: }
4486:
4487: % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4488: %
4489: \def\commondummies{%
4490: %
4491: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4492: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
4493: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4494: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4495: % from whatever follows.
4496: %
4497: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4498: % space.
4499: %
4500: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4501: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4502: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4503: %
4504: \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
4505: \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
4506: \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4507: %
4508: \commondummiesnofonts
4509: %
4510: \definedummyletter\_%
4511: \definedummyletter\-%
4512: %
4513: % Non-English letters.
4514: \definedummyword\AA
4515: \definedummyword\AE
4516: \definedummyword\DH
4517: \definedummyword\L
4518: \definedummyword\O
4519: \definedummyword\OE
4520: \definedummyword\TH
4521: \definedummyword\aa
4522: \definedummyword\ae
4523: \definedummyword\dh
4524: \definedummyword\exclamdown
4525: \definedummyword\l
4526: \definedummyword\o
4527: \definedummyword\oe
4528: \definedummyword\ordf
4529: \definedummyword\ordm
4530: \definedummyword\questiondown
4531: \definedummyword\ss
4532: \definedummyword\th
4533: %
4534: % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4535: \definedummyword\bf
4536: \definedummyword\gtr
4537: \definedummyword\hat
4538: \definedummyword\less
4539: \definedummyword\sf
4540: \definedummyword\sl
4541: \definedummyword\tclose
4542: \definedummyword\tt
4543: %
4544: \definedummyword\LaTeX
4545: \definedummyword\TeX
4546: %
4547: % Assorted special characters.
4548: \definedummyword\arrow
4549: \definedummyword\bullet
4550: \definedummyword\comma
4551: \definedummyword\copyright
4552: \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4553: \definedummyword\dots
4554: \definedummyword\enddots
4555: \definedummyword\entrybreak
4556: \definedummyword\equiv
4557: \definedummyword\error
4558: \definedummyword\euro
4559: \definedummyword\expansion
4560: \definedummyword\geq
4561: \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4562: \definedummyword\guillemetright
4563: \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4564: \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4565: \definedummyword\lbracechar
4566: \definedummyword\leq
4567: \definedummyword\minus
4568: \definedummyword\ogonek
4569: \definedummyword\pounds
4570: \definedummyword\point
4571: \definedummyword\print
4572: \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4573: \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4574: \definedummyword\quotedblright
4575: \definedummyword\quoteleft
4576: \definedummyword\quoteright
4577: \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4578: \definedummyword\rbracechar
4579: \definedummyword\result
4580: \definedummyword\textdegree
4581: %
4582: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4583: \macrolist
4584: %
4585: \normalturnoffactive
4586: %
4587: % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4588: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4589: \makevalueexpandable
4590: }
4591:
4592: % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4593: %
4594: \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4595: % Control letters and accents.
4596: \definedummyletter\!%
4597: \definedummyaccent\"%
4598: \definedummyaccent\'%
4599: \definedummyletter\*%
4600: \definedummyaccent\,%
4601: \definedummyletter\.%
4602: \definedummyletter\/%
4603: \definedummyletter\:%
4604: \definedummyaccent\=%
4605: \definedummyletter\?%
4606: \definedummyaccent\^%
4607: \definedummyaccent\`%
4608: \definedummyaccent\~%
4609: \definedummyword\u
4610: \definedummyword\v
4611: \definedummyword\H
4612: \definedummyword\dotaccent
4613: \definedummyword\ogonek
4614: \definedummyword\ringaccent
4615: \definedummyword\tieaccent
4616: \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4617: \definedummyword\udotaccent
4618: \definedummyword\dotless
4619: %
4620: % Texinfo font commands.
4621: \definedummyword\b
4622: \definedummyword\i
4623: \definedummyword\r
4624: \definedummyword\sansserif
4625: \definedummyword\sc
4626: \definedummyword\slanted
4627: \definedummyword\t
4628: %
4629: % Commands that take arguments.
4630: \definedummyword\abbr
4631: \definedummyword\acronym
4632: \definedummyword\anchor
4633: \definedummyword\cite
4634: \definedummyword\code
4635: \definedummyword\command
4636: \definedummyword\dfn
4637: \definedummyword\dmn
4638: \definedummyword\email
4639: \definedummyword\emph
4640: \definedummyword\env
4641: \definedummyword\file
4642: \definedummyword\image
4643: \definedummyword\indicateurl
4644: \definedummyword\inforef
4645: \definedummyword\kbd
4646: \definedummyword\key
4647: \definedummyword\math
4648: \definedummyword\option
4649: \definedummyword\pxref
4650: \definedummyword\ref
4651: \definedummyword\samp
4652: \definedummyword\strong
4653: \definedummyword\tie
4654: \definedummyword\uref
4655: \definedummyword\url
4656: \definedummyword\var
4657: \definedummyword\verb
4658: \definedummyword\w
4659: \definedummyword\xref
4660: }
4661:
4662: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4663: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
4664: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4665: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4666: %
4667: \def\indexnofonts{%
4668: % Accent commands should become @asis.
4669: \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
4670: % We can just ignore other control letters.
4671: \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
4672: % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
4673: \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4674: %
4675: \commondummiesnofonts
4676: %
4677: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4678: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4679: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4680: %\let\tt=\asis
4681: %
4682: \def\ { }%
4683: \def\@{@}%
4684: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4685: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
4686: %
4687: % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
4688: % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
4689: % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
4690: \def\{{|a}%
4691: \def\lbracechar{|a}%
4692: %
4693: \def\}{|b}%
4694: \def\rbracechar{|b}%
4695: %
4696: % Non-English letters.
4697: \def\AA{AA}%
4698: \def\AE{AE}%
4699: \def\DH{DZZ}%
4700: \def\L{L}%
4701: \def\OE{OE}%
4702: \def\O{O}%
4703: \def\TH{ZZZ}%
4704: \def\aa{aa}%
4705: \def\ae{ae}%
4706: \def\dh{dzz}%
4707: \def\exclamdown{!}%
4708: \def\l{l}%
4709: \def\oe{oe}%
4710: \def\ordf{a}%
4711: \def\ordm{o}%
4712: \def\o{o}%
4713: \def\questiondown{?}%
4714: \def\ss{ss}%
4715: \def\th{zzz}%
4716: %
4717: \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
4718: \def\TeX{TeX}%
4719: %
4720: % Assorted special characters.
4721: % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4722: \def\arrow{->}%
4723: \def\bullet{bullet}%
4724: \def\comma{,}%
4725: \def\copyright{copyright}%
4726: \def\dots{...}%
4727: \def\enddots{...}%
4728: \def\equiv{==}%
4729: \def\error{error}%
4730: \def\euro{euro}%
4731: \def\expansion{==>}%
4732: \def\geq{>=}%
4733: \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
4734: \def\guillemetright{>>}%
4735: \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
4736: \def\guilsinglright{>}%
4737: \def\leq{<=}%
4738: \def\minus{-}%
4739: \def\point{.}%
4740: \def\pounds{pounds}%
4741: \def\print{-|}%
4742: \def\quotedblbase{"}%
4743: \def\quotedblleft{"}%
4744: \def\quotedblright{"}%
4745: \def\quoteleft{`}%
4746: \def\quoteright{'}%
4747: \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
4748: \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
4749: \def\result{=>}%
4750: \def\textdegree{o}%
4751: %
4752: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
4753: \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
4754: %
4755: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4756: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4757: % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4758: % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4759: % that starts with \.
4760: %
4761: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4762: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
4763: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4764: %
4765: \macrolist
4766: }
4767:
4768: % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
4769: % ignore left quotes in the sort term.
4770: {\catcode`\`=\active
4771: \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
4772:
4773: \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
4774: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4775:
4776: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4777: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4778: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4779:
4780: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
4781: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4782: % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4783: % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4784: %
4785: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4786: \iflinks
4787: {%
4788: % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4789: \toks0 = {#2}%
4790: % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4791: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
4792: \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4793: \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4794: \fi
4795: %
4796: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
4797: %
4798: \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4799: }%
4800: \fi
4801: }
4802:
4803: % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
4804: %
4805: \def\dosubindwrite{%
4806: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
4807: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
4808: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
4809: \fi
4810: %
4811: % Remember, we are within a group.
4812: \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
4813: \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
4814: % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
4815: %
4816: % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
4817: % get the string to sort by.
4818: {\indexnofonts
4819: \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
4820: \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
4821: }%
4822: %
4823: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
4824: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
4825: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
4826: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
4827: % sorted result.
4828: \edef\temp{%
4829: \write\writeto{%
4830: \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
4831: }%
4832: \temp
4833: }
4834:
4835: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
4836: %
4837: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
4838: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
4839: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
4840: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
4841: % sequences like this:
4842: % @end defun
4843: % @tindex whatever
4844: % @defun ...
4845: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
4846: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
4847: % the previous defun.
4848: %
4849: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
4850: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
4851: %
4852: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
4853: %
4854: % But wait, there is a catch there:
4855: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
4856: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
4857: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
4858: % representation of the skip.
4859: %
4860: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
4861: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
4862: %
4863: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
4864: %
4865: \newskip\whatsitskip
4866: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
4867: %
4868: % ..., ready, GO:
4869: %
4870: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
4871: #1%
4872: \else
4873: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
4874: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
4875: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
4876: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
4877: %
4878: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
4879: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
4880: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
4881: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
4882: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
4883: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4884: \else
4885: \vskip-\whatsitskip
4886: \fi
4887: %
4888: #1%
4889: %
4890: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4891: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
4892: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
4893: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
4894: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
4895: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
4896: % @deffn deffn-whatever
4897: % @vindex index-whatever
4898: % Description.
4899: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
4900: % and the "Description." paragraph.
4901: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
4902: \else
4903: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
4904: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
4905: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
4906: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
4907: \fi
4908: \fi}
4909:
4910: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
4911: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
4912: % or
4913: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
4914: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
4915: % containing these kinds of lines:
4916: % \initial {c}
4917: % before the first topic whose initial is c
4918: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
4919: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
4920: % \primary {topic}
4921: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
4922: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
4923: % for each subtopic.
4924:
4925: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
4926: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
4927:
4928: \def\findex {\fnindex}
4929: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
4930: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
4931: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
4932: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
4933: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
4934:
4935: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
4936: {\obeylines %
4937: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
4938: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
4939:
4940: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
4941:
4942: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
4943: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
4944: %
4945: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
4946: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
4947: %
4948: \smallfonts \rm
4949: \tolerance = 9500
4950: \plainfrenchspacing
4951: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
4952: %
4953: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
4954: % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
4955: % \initial {@}
4956: % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
4957: % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
4958: \catcode`\@ = 11
4959: \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
4960: \ifeof 1
4961: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
4962: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
4963: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
4964: % there is some text.
4965: \putwordIndexNonexistent
4966: \else
4967: %
4968: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
4969: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
4970: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
4971: \read 1 to \temp
4972: \ifeof 1
4973: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
4974: \else
4975: % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
4976: % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
4977: % to make right now.
4978: \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
4979: \catcode`\\ = 0
4980: \escapechar = `\\
4981: \begindoublecolumns
4982: \input \jobname.#1s
4983: \enddoublecolumns
4984: \fi
4985: \fi
4986: \closein 1
4987: \endgroup}
4988:
4989: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
4990: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
4991:
4992: \def\initial#1{{%
4993: % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
4994: \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
4995: %
4996: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
4997: \removelastskip
4998: %
4999: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
5000: \nobreak
5001: \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
5002: \penalty 0
5003: \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
5004: %
5005: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
5006: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
5007: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
5008: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
5009: %
5010: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
5011: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
5012: \leftline{\secbf #1}%
5013: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
5014: \nobreak
5015: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
5016: }}
5017:
5018: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
5019: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
5020: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
5021: %
5022: % A straightforward implementation would start like this:
5023: % \def\entry#1#2{...
5024: % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
5025: % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
5026: % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
5027: % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
5028: % --kasal, 21nov03
5029: \def\entry{%
5030: \begingroup
5031: %
5032: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
5033: % affect previous text.
5034: \par
5035: %
5036: % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
5037: \parfillskip = 0in
5038: %
5039: % No extra space above this paragraph.
5040: \parskip = 0in
5041: %
5042: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
5043: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
5044: %
5045: % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
5046: % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
5047: % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
5048: % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
5049: % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
5050: %
5051: % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
5052: % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
5053: \hangindent = 2em
5054: %
5055: % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
5056: % with blank space.
5057: \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
5058: %
5059: % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
5060: % columns.
5061: \vskip 0pt plus1pt
5062: %
5063: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
5064: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
5065: % titles, for instance.
5066: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5067: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
5068: %
5069: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
5070: \afterassignment\doentry
5071: \let\temp =
5072: }
5073: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5074: \def\doentry{%
5075: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
5076: \noindent
5077: \aftergroup\finishentry
5078: % And now comes the text of the entry.
5079: }
5080: \def\finishentry#1{%
5081: % #1 is the page number.
5082: %
5083: % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
5084: % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
5085: % cursed by a Unix daemon.
5086: \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
5087: \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
5088: \ %
5089: \else
5090: %
5091: % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
5092: % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
5093: % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
5094: \hfil\penalty50
5095: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
5096: %
5097: % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
5098: % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
5099: % \hbox ensues.
5100: \ifpdf
5101: \pdfgettoks#1.%
5102: \ \the\toksA
5103: \else
5104: \ #1%
5105: \fi
5106: \fi
5107: \par
5108: \endgroup
5109: }
5110:
5111: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
5112: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
5113: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
5114:
5115: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
5116:
5117: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
5118: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
5119: \parfillskip=0in
5120: \parskip=0in
5121: \hangindent=1in
5122: \hangafter=1
5123: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
5124: \ifpdf
5125: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
5126: \else
5127: #2
5128: \fi
5129: \par
5130: }}
5131:
5132: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5133: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5134: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5135: \catcode`\@=11
5136:
5137: \newbox\partialpage
5138: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5139:
5140: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5141: % Grab any single-column material above us.
5142: \output = {%
5143: %
5144: % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
5145: % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
5146: % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
5147: % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
5148: % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
5149: % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
5150: % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
5151: \ifvoid\partialpage \else
5152: \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
5153: \fi
5154: %
5155: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
5156: % Unvbox the main output page.
5157: \unvbox\PAGE
5158: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5159: }%
5160: }%
5161: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5162: %
5163: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5164: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
5165: %
5166: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
5167: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5168: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
5169: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5170: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5171: %
5172: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5173: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5174: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
5175: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5176: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5177: %
5178: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
5179: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5180: % been clobbered.
5181: %
5182: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
5183: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
5184: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
5185: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5186: %
5187: % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
5188: % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
5189: \vsize = 2\vsize
5190: }
5191:
5192: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5193: % the last.
5194: %
5195: \def\doublecolumnout{%
5196: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
5197: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5198: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5199: % previous page.
5200: \dimen@ = \vsize
5201: \divide\dimen@ by 2
5202: \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
5203: %
5204: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5205: \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
5206: \onepageout\pagesofar
5207: \unvbox255
5208: \penalty\outputpenalty
5209: }
5210: %
5211: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5212: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5213: \def\pagesofar{%
5214: \unvbox\partialpage
5215: %
5216: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5217: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
5218: \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
5219: }
5220: %
5221: % All done with double columns.
5222: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
5223: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5224: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
5225: % following situation:
5226: %
5227: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5228: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5229: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
5230: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5231: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
5232: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5233: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5234: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5235: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5236: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5237: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
5238: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5239: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5240: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5241: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5242: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5243: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5244: % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
5245: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5246: %
5247: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5248: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5249: \penalty0
5250: %
5251: \output = {%
5252: % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
5253: % current page, no automatic page break.
5254: \balancecolumns
5255: %
5256: % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
5257: % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
5258: % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5259: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5260: % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
5261: % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
5262: % the output somewhat more palatable.)
5263: \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
5264: }%
5265: \eject
5266: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5267: %
5268: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5269: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
5270: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
5271: % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
5272: \pagegoal = \vsize
5273: }
5274: %
5275: % Called at the end of the double column material.
5276: \def\balancecolumns{%
5277: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5278: \dimen@ = \ht0
5279: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
5280: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
5281: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
5282: %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
5283: \splittopskip = \topskip
5284: % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
5285: {%
5286: \vbadness = 10000
5287: \loop
5288: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
5289: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
5290: \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
5291: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
5292: \repeat
5293: }%
5294: %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
5295: \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
5296: \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
5297: %
5298: \pagesofar
5299: }
5300: \catcode`\@ = \other
5301:
5302:
5303: \message{sectioning,}
5304: % Chapters, sections, etc.
5305:
5306: % Let's start with @part.
5307: \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5308: \def\partzzz#1{%
5309: \chapoddpage
5310: \null
5311: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
5312: \begingroup
5313: \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
5314: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
5315: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5316: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
5317: \chapoddpage
5318: \endgroup
5319: }
5320:
5321: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
5322: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5323: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
5324: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
5325: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5326: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
5327: \newcount\chapno
5328: \newcount\secno \secno=0
5329: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
5330: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
5331:
5332: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5333: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
5334: %
5335: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5336: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5337: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5338: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5339: %
5340: \def\appendixletter{%
5341: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
5342: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
5343: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
5344: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
5345: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
5346: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
5347: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
5348: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
5349: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
5350: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5351: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5352: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5353: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5354: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5355: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5356: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5357: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5358: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5359: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5360: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5361: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5362: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5363: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5364: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5365: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5366: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5367: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5368: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
5369: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5370: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5371: \else\char\the\appendixno
5372: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5373: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5374:
5375: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5376: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
5377: % these. @section does likewise.
5378: \def\thischapter{}
5379: \def\thischapternum{}
5380: \def\thischaptername{}
5381: \def\thissection{}
5382: \def\thissectionnum{}
5383: \def\thissectionname{}
5384:
5385: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5386: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5387:
5388: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5389: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
5390: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
5391:
5392: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5393: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
5394: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
5395:
5396: % we only have subsub.
5397: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
5398: %
5399: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5400: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5401: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
5402: %
5403: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5404: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5405: \def\chapheadtype{N}
5406:
5407: % Choose a heading macro
5408: % #1 is heading type
5409: % #2 is heading level
5410: % #3 is text for heading
5411: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5412: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5413: \absseclevel=#2
5414: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
5415: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5416: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
5417: \absseclevel = 0
5418: \else
5419: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
5420: \absseclevel = 3
5421: \fi
5422: \fi
5423: % The heading type:
5424: \def\headtype{#1}%
5425: \if \headtype U%
5426: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
5427: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
5428: \fi
5429: \else
5430: % Check for appendix sections:
5431: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
5432: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5433: \else
5434: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
5435: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
5436: \fi\fi
5437: \fi
5438: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5439: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
5440: \def\headtype{U}%
5441: \else
5442: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
5443: \fi
5444: \fi
5445: % Now print the heading:
5446: \if \headtype U%
5447: \ifcase\absseclevel
5448: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
5449: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5450: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5451: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5452: \fi
5453: \else
5454: \if \headtype A%
5455: \ifcase\absseclevel
5456: \appendixzzz{#3}%
5457: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5458: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5459: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5460: \fi
5461: \else
5462: \ifcase\absseclevel
5463: \chapterzzz{#3}%
5464: \or \seczzz{#3}%
5465: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5466: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5467: \fi
5468: \fi
5469: \fi
5470: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5471: }
5472:
5473: % an interface:
5474: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
5475: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
5476: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
5477:
5478: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
5479: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5480: %
5481: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5482: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5483: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5484: %
5485: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5486: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
5487: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5488: % as an @include file.
5489: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5490: \global\advance\chapno by 1
5491: %
5492: % Used for \float.
5493: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
5494: \resetallfloatnos
5495: %
5496: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5497: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5498: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5499: %
5500: % Write the actual heading.
5501: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
5502: %
5503: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5504: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
5505: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5506: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5507: }
5508:
5509: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5510: %
5511: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
5512: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5513: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
5514: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
5515: \resetallfloatnos
5516: %
5517: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5518: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5519: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5520: %
5521: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
5522: %
5523: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
5524: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
5525: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
5526: }
5527:
5528: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
5529: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
5530: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5531: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5532: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
5533: %
5534: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5535: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5536: \resetallfloatnos
5537: %
5538: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5539: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5540: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5541: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5542: % to be executed, not expanded).
5543: %
5544: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5545: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
5546: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
5547: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
5548: % the toc entries.)
5549: \toks0 = {#1}%
5550: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
5551: %
5552: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
5553: %
5554: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
5555: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
5556: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
5557: }
5558:
5559: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
5560: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
5561: % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
5562: % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
5563: % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
5564: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
5565: \unnmhead0{#1}%
5566: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5567: }
5568:
5569: % @top is like @unnumbered.
5570: \let\top\unnumbered
5571:
5572: % Sections.
5573: %
5574: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
5575: \def\seczzz#1{%
5576: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5577: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
5578: }
5579:
5580: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
5581: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
5582: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
5583: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5584: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
5585: }
5586: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
5587:
5588: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
5589: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
5590: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
5591: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
5592: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
5593: }
5594:
5595: % Subsections.
5596: %
5597: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
5598: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
5599: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
5600: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5601: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5602: }
5603:
5604: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
5605: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
5606: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
5607: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5608: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
5609: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5610: }
5611:
5612: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
5613: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
5614: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
5615: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5616: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
5617: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5618: }
5619:
5620: % Subsubsections.
5621: %
5622: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
5623: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
5624: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5625: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5626: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
5627: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5628: }
5629:
5630: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
5631: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
5632: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
5633: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5634: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
5635: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5636: }
5637:
5638: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
5639: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
5640: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5641: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5642: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
5643: {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5644: }
5645:
5646: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
5647: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
5648: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
5649: \let\section = \numberedsec
5650: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5651: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5652:
5653: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
5654:
5655: \def\majorheading{%
5656: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
5657: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
5658: }
5659:
5660: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
5661: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
5662: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
5663: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
5664: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5665: }
5666:
5667: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
5668: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5669: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5670: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5671: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5672: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5673: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5674:
5675: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
5676: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
5677: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
5678:
5679: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
5680: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
5681:
5682: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
5683: \newskip\chapheadingskip
5684:
5685: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
5686: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
5687: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
5688: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
5689: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
5690: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
5691: \def\chapoddpage{%
5692: \chappager
5693: \ifodd\pageno \else
5694: \begingroup
5695: \headingsoff
5696: \null
5697: \chappager
5698: \endgroup
5699: \fi
5700: }
5701:
5702: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
5703:
5704: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
5705: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5706: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
5707: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
5708:
5709: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
5710: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5711: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
5712: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
5713: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
5714:
5715: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
5716: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
5717: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
5718: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
5719: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
5720:
5721: \CHAPPAGon
5722:
5723: % Chapter opening.
5724: %
5725: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
5726: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
5727: %
5728: % To test against our argument.
5729: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
5730: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
5731: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
5732: %
5733: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
5734: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5735: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5736: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5737: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5738: \gdef\thissection{}}%
5739: %
5740: \def\temptype{#2}%
5741: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5742: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5743: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
5744: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5745: \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5746: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
5747: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5748: \toks0={#1}%
5749: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5750: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5751: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
5752: % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
5753: % commands in some of the translations.
5754: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
5755: \noexpand\thischapternum:
5756: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5757: }%
5758: \else
5759: \toks0={#1}%
5760: \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5761: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5762: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
5763: % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
5764: % commands in some of the translations.
5765: \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
5766: \noexpand\thischapternum:
5767: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5768: }%
5769: \fi\fi\fi
5770: %
5771: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5772: % the preceding space.
5773: \safewhatsit\domark
5774: %
5775: % Insert the chapter heading break.
5776: \pchapsepmacro
5777: %
5778: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5779: % between here and the heading.
5780: \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5781: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5782: \domark
5783: %
5784: {%
5785: \chapfonts \rmisbold
5786: %
5787: % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
5788: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
5789: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
5790: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5791: %
5792: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
5793: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
5794: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5795: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5796: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
5797: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5798: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
5799: \def\toctype{omit}%
5800: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5801: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
5802: \def\toctype{app}%
5803: \else
5804: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
5805: \def\toctype{numchap}%
5806: \fi\fi\fi
5807: %
5808: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
5809: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
5810: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
5811: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
5812: %
5813: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
5814: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
5815: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
5816: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
5817: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
5818: \donoderef{#2}%
5819: %
5820: % Typeset the actual heading.
5821: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
5822: \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
5823: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
5824: }%
5825: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
5826: \nobreak
5827: }
5828:
5829: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
5830: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5831: \def\centerparameters{%
5832: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
5833: \leftskip = \rightskip
5834: \parfillskip = 0pt
5835: }
5836:
5837:
5838: % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
5839: % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
5840: %
5841: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
5842: %
5843: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
5844: \chapoddpage
5845: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
5846: \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
5847: }
5848: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
5849: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
5850: \par\penalty 5000 %
5851: }
5852: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
5853: \chapoddpage
5854: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
5855: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
5856: }
5857: \def\CHAPFopen{%
5858: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
5859: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
5860:
5861:
5862: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
5863: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
5864: %
5865: \newskip\secheadingskip
5866: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
5867:
5868: % Subsection titles.
5869: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
5870: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
5871:
5872: % Subsubsection titles.
5873: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
5874: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
5875:
5876:
5877: % Print any size, any type, section title.
5878: %
5879: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
5880: % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
5881: % section number.
5882: %
5883: \def\seckeyword{sec}
5884: %
5885: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
5886: {%
5887: \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
5888: %
5889: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
5890: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
5891: %
5892: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
5893: \def\temptype{#3}%
5894: %
5895: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5896: \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5897: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5898: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5899: \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5900: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
5901: \fi
5902: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5903: % Don't redefine \thissection.
5904: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5905: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5906: \toks0={#1}%
5907: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5908: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5909: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5910: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5911: % commands in some of the translations.
5912: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5913: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5914: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5915: }%
5916: \fi
5917: \else
5918: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5919: \toks0={#1}%
5920: \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5921: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5922: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5923: % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5924: % commands in some of the translations.
5925: \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5926: \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5927: \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5928: }%
5929: \fi
5930: \fi\fi\fi
5931: %
5932: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
5933: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
5934: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
5935: \par
5936: %
5937: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5938: % the preceding space.
5939: \safewhatsit\domark
5940: %
5941: % Insert space above the heading.
5942: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
5943: %
5944: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
5945: % between here and the heading.
5946: \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5947: \domark
5948: %
5949: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
5950: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5951: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5952: \def\toctype{unn}%
5953: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5954: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5955: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
5956: % and don't redefine \lastsection.
5957: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5958: \def\toctype{omit}%
5959: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
5960: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5961: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5962: \def\toctype{app}%
5963: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5964: \else
5965: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5966: \def\toctype{num}%
5967: \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5968: \fi\fi\fi
5969: %
5970: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
5971: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
5972: %
5973: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
5974: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
5975: \donoderef{#3}%
5976: %
5977: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
5978: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
5979: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
5980: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
5981: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
5982: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
5983: \nobreak
5984: %
5985: % Output the actual section heading.
5986: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5987: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
5988: \unhbox0 #1}%
5989: }%
5990: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
5991: % Don't allow stretch, though.
5992: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
5993: %
5994: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
5995: % was followed by glue.
5996: \nobreak
5997: %
5998: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
5999: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
6000: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
6001: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
6002: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
6003: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
6004: \vskip-\parskip
6005: %
6006: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
6007: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
6008: % and do the needful.
6009: \penalty 10001
6010: }
6011:
6012:
6013: \message{toc,}
6014: % Table of contents.
6015: \newwrite\tocfile
6016:
6017: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
6018: % Called from @chapter, etc.
6019: %
6020: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
6021: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
6022: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
6023: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
6024: % destination to jump to.
6025: %
6026: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
6027: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
6028: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
6029: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
6030: %
6031: \newif\iftocfileopened
6032: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
6033: %
6034: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
6035: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
6036: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
6037: \iftocfileopened\else
6038: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
6039: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
6040: \fi
6041: %
6042: \iflinks
6043: {\atdummies
6044: \edef\temp{%
6045: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
6046: \temp
6047: }%
6048: \fi
6049: \fi
6050: %
6051: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
6052: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
6053: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
6054: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
6055: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
6056: % `1', and two named `2'.
6057: \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
6058: }
6059:
6060:
6061: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
6062: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
6063: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
6064: %
6065: \def\activecatcodes{%
6066: \catcode`\"=\active
6067: \catcode`\$=\active
6068: \catcode`\<=\active
6069: \catcode`\>=\active
6070: \catcode`\\=\active
6071: \catcode`\^=\active
6072: \catcode`\_=\active
6073: \catcode`\|=\active
6074: \catcode`\~=\active
6075: }
6076:
6077:
6078: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
6079: \def\readtocfile{%
6080: \setupdatafile
6081: \activecatcodes
6082: \input \tocreadfilename
6083: }
6084:
6085: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
6086: \newcount\savepageno
6087: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
6088:
6089: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
6090: %
6091: \def\startcontents#1{%
6092: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
6093: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
6094: % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
6095: % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
6096: \contentsalignmacro
6097: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
6098: %
6099: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
6100: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
6101: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
6102: %
6103: \savepageno = \pageno
6104: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
6105: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
6106: \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
6107: %
6108: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6109: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
6110: }
6111:
6112: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
6113: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6114: %
6115: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
6116:
6117: % Normal (long) toc.
6118: %
6119: \def\contents{%
6120: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6121: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6122: \ifeof 1 \else
6123: \readtocfile
6124: \fi
6125: \vfill \eject
6126: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6127: \ifeof 1 \else
6128: \pdfmakeoutlines
6129: \fi
6130: \closein 1
6131: \endgroup
6132: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6133: \global\pageno = \savepageno
6134: }
6135:
6136: % And just the chapters.
6137: \def\summarycontents{%
6138: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6139: %
6140: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
6141: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
6142: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
6143: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
6144: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6145: \secfonts
6146: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
6147: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
6148: \rm
6149: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
6150: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
6151: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
6152: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
6153: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
6154: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6155: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6156: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6157: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6158: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6159: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6160: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6161: \ifeof 1 \else
6162: \readtocfile
6163: \fi
6164: \closein 1
6165: \vfill \eject
6166: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6167: \endgroup
6168: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6169: \global\pageno = \savepageno
6170: }
6171: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
6172:
6173: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6174: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6175: %
6176: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6177: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6178: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6179: % But use \hss just in case.
6180: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
6181: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
6182: %
6183: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6184: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
6185: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6186: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6187: % there are before deciding ...
6188: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
6189: }
6190:
6191: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
6192: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
6193: % The last argument is the page number.
6194: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
6195:
6196: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
6197: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6198: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6199: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
6200: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
6201: %
6202: % Parts, in the short toc.
6203: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6204: \penalty-300
6205: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
6206: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6207: }
6208:
6209: % Chapters, in the main contents.
6210: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6211: %
6212: % Chapters, in the short toc.
6213: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
6214: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6215: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
6216: }
6217:
6218: % Appendices, in the main contents.
6219: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6220: %
6221: \def\appendixbox#1{%
6222: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6223: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
6224: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6225: %
6226: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6227:
6228: % Unnumbered chapters.
6229: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
6230: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
6231:
6232: % Sections.
6233: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6234: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
6235: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
6236:
6237: % Subsections.
6238: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6239: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
6240: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6241:
6242: % And subsubsections.
6243: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6244: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
6245: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6246:
6247: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6248: % Same as \defaultparindent.
6249: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
6250:
6251: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
6252: % page number.
6253: %
6254: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6255: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6256: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
6257: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
6258: \begingroup
6259: \chapentryfonts
6260: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6261: \endgroup
6262: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
6263: }
6264:
6265: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6266: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
6267: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6268: \endgroup}
6269:
6270: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6271: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
6272: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6273: \endgroup}
6274:
6275: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6276: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
6277: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6278: \endgroup}
6279:
6280: % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
6281: \let\tocentry = \entry
6282:
6283: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
6284: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
6285:
6286: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6287: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6288:
6289: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
6290: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
6291: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6292: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6293:
6294:
6295: \message{environments,}
6296: % @foo ... @end foo.
6297:
6298: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
6299: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
6300: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
6301:
6302: \envdef\tex{%
6303: \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
6304: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
6305: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
6306: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
6307: \catcode `\%=14
6308: \catcode `\+=\other
6309: \catcode `\"=\other
6310: \catcode `\|=\other
6311: \catcode `\<=\other
6312: \catcode `\>=\other
6313: \catcode `\`=\other
6314: \catcode `\'=\other
6315: \escapechar=`\\
6316: %
6317: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
6318: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
6319: \mathactive
6320: %
6321: \let\b=\ptexb
6322: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
6323: \let\c=\ptexc
6324: \let\,=\ptexcomma
6325: \let\.=\ptexdot
6326: \let\dots=\ptexdots
6327: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
6328: \let\!=\ptexexclam
6329: \let\i=\ptexi
6330: \let\indent=\ptexindent
6331: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6332: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
6333: \let\+=\tabalign
6334: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
6335: \let\/=\ptexslash
6336: \let\*=\ptexstar
6337: \let\t=\ptext
6338: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
6339: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
6340: %
6341: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
6342: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
6343: \def\@{@}%
6344: }
6345: % There is no need to define \Etex.
6346:
6347: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
6348: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
6349: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
6350:
6351: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
6352: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
6353:
6354: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
6355: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
6356: % have any width.
6357: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
6358:
6359: % This space is always present above and below environments.
6360: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
6361:
6362: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
6363: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
6364: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
6365: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
6366: %
6367: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
6368: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6369: % \sectionheading, q.v.
6370: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
6371: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
6372: \endgraf
6373: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
6374: \removelastskip
6375: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6376: % or better ...
6377: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
6378: \vskip\envskipamount
6379: \fi
6380: \fi
6381: }}
6382:
6383: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
6384:
6385: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6386: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6387: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
6388:
6389: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6390: % environment contents.
6391: \font\circle=lcircle10
6392: \newdimen\circthick
6393: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6394: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6395: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
6396: %
6397: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6398: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
6399: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
6400: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
6401: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6402: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
6403: \hskip\rskip}}
6404: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6405: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
6406: \hskip\rskip}}
6407: %
6408: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6409:
6410: \envdef\cartouche{%
6411: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6412: \startsavinginserts
6413: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
6414: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
6415: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
6416: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
6417: \cartouter=\hsize
6418: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
6419: % side, and for 6pt waste from
6420: % each corner char, and rule thickness
6421: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
6422: % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
6423: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6424: %
6425: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
6426: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
6427: % collide with the section heading.
6428: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
6429: %
6430: \vbox\bgroup
6431: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
6432: \carttop
6433: \hbox\bgroup
6434: \hskip\lskip
6435: \vrule\kern3pt
6436: \vbox\bgroup
6437: \kern3pt
6438: \hsize=\cartinner
6439: \baselineskip=\normbskip
6440: \lineskip=\normlskip
6441: \parskip=\normpskip
6442: \vskip -\parskip
6443: \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
6444: }
6445: \def\Ecartouche{%
6446: \ifhmode\par\fi
6447: \kern3pt
6448: \egroup
6449: \kern3pt\vrule
6450: \hskip\rskip
6451: \egroup
6452: \cartbot
6453: \egroup
6454: \checkinserts
6455: }
6456:
6457:
6458: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6459: % inside a group.
6460: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
6461: \def\nonfillstart{%
6462: \aboveenvbreak
6463: \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
6464: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6465: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6466: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6467: \parskip = 0pt
6468: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6469: % the normal \indent.
6470: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
6471: \parindent = 0pt
6472: \let\indent\nonfillindent
6473: %
6474: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6475: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6476: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6477: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
6478: \else
6479: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6480: \fi
6481: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
6482: }
6483:
6484: \begingroup
6485: \obeyspaces
6486: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6487: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6488: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6489: % @indent.
6490: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6491: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6492: \ifx\temp %
6493: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6494: \else%
6495: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6496: \fi%
6497: }%
6498: \endgroup
6499: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6500: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6501:
6502: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6503: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6504: % This affects the following displayed environments:
6505: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6506: %
6507: \def\smallword{small}
6508: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
6509: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
6510: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
6511: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
6512: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
6513: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
6514: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
6515: % to change the fonts afterward.
6516: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6517: \smallexamplefonts \rm
6518: \fi
6519: }
6520: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
6521: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
6522: \else
6523: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6524: \smallexamplefonts \rm
6525: \fi
6526: }
6527:
6528: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
6529: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
6530: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
6531: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
6532: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
6533: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6534: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6535: }
6536:
6537: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
6538: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
6539: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
6540: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
6541: }
6542: %
6543: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
6544: % @example: same as @lisp.
6545: %
6546: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
6547: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
6548: %
6549: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
6550: \nonfillstart
6551: \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
6552: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
6553: \gobble % eat return
6554: }
6555: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
6556: %
6557: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
6558: \nonfillstart
6559: \gobble
6560: }
6561:
6562: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
6563: %
6564: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
6565: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6566: \nonfillstart
6567: \gobble
6568: }
6569:
6570: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
6571: \envdef\flushleft{%
6572: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6573: \nonfillstart
6574: \gobble
6575: }
6576: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
6577:
6578: % @flushright.
6579: %
6580: \envdef\flushright{%
6581: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6582: \nonfillstart
6583: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
6584: \gobble
6585: }
6586: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
6587:
6588:
6589: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
6590: % justification. From plain.tex.
6591: \envdef\raggedright{%
6592: \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
6593: }
6594: \let\Eraggedright\par
6595:
6596: \envdef\raggedleft{%
6597: \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
6598: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6599: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6600: % badness reporting.
6601: }
6602: \let\Eraggedleft\par
6603:
6604: \envdef\raggedcenter{%
6605: \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
6606: \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6607: \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6608: % badness reporting.
6609: }
6610: \let\Eraggedcenter\par
6611:
6612:
6613: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
6614: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
6615: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
6616: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
6617: %
6618: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
6619: %
6620: \def\quotationstart{%
6621: \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
6622: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6623: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
6624: \fi
6625: \parsearg\quotationlabel
6626: }
6627:
6628: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
6629: % doing normal filling.
6630: %
6631: \def\Equotation{%
6632: \par
6633: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
6634: % indent a bit.
6635: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
6636: \fi
6637: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6638: }
6639: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
6640:
6641: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
6642: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
6643: \def\temp{#1}%
6644: \ifx\temp\empty \else
6645: {\bf #1: }%
6646: \fi
6647: }
6648:
6649: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
6650: % has no optional argument.
6651: %
6652: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
6653: %
6654: \def\indentedblockstart{%
6655: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
6656: \parindent=0pt
6657: %
6658: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
6659: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6660: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6661: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
6662: \else
6663: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6664: \fi
6665: }
6666:
6667: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
6668: %
6669: \def\Eindentedblock{%
6670: \par
6671: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6672: }
6673: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
6674:
6675:
6676: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
6677: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
6678: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
6679: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
6680: %
6681: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
6682: %
6683: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
6684: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
6685: % verbatim line.
6686: \def\dospecials{%
6687: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
6688: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
6689: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
6690: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
6691: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
6692: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
6693: %\do\`\do\'%
6694: }
6695: %
6696: % [Knuth] p. 380
6697: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
6698: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
6699: %
6700: % Setup for the @verb command.
6701: %
6702: % Eight spaces for a tab
6703: \begingroup
6704: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6705: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
6706: \endgroup
6707: %
6708: \def\setupverb{%
6709: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6710: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
6711: \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
6712: \tabeightspaces
6713: % Respect line breaks,
6714: % print special symbols as themselves, and
6715: % make each space count
6716: % must do in this order:
6717: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6718: }
6719:
6720: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
6721: %
6722: % Real tab expansion.
6723: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
6724: %
6725: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
6726: % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
6727: % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
6728: % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
6729: % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
6730: % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
6731: \newbox\verbbox
6732: \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
6733: %
6734: \begingroup
6735: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6736: \gdef\tabexpand{%
6737: \catcode`\^^I=\active
6738: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
6739: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
6740: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
6741: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
6742: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
6743: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
6744: }%
6745: }
6746: \endgroup
6747:
6748: % start the verbatim environment.
6749: \def\setupverbatim{%
6750: \let\nonarrowing = t%
6751: \nonfillstart
6752: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6753: % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
6754: % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
6755: \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
6756: \tabexpand
6757: \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
6758: % Respect line breaks,
6759: % print special symbols as themselves, and
6760: % make each space count.
6761: % Must do in this order:
6762: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6763: \everypar{\starttabbox}%
6764: }
6765:
6766: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
6767: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
6768: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
6769: %
6770: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
6771: %
6772: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
6773: \begingroup
6774: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
6775: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
6776: \endgroup
6777: %
6778: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
6779: %
6780: %
6781: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
6782: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
6783: %
6784: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
6785: %
6786: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
6787: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
6788: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
6789: %
6790: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
6791: %
6792: \begingroup
6793: \catcode`\ =\active
6794: \obeylines %
6795: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
6796: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
6797: % line in the output.
6798: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
6799: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
6800: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
6801: \endgroup
6802: %
6803: \envdef\verbatim{%
6804: \setupverbatim\doverbatim
6805: }
6806: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
6807:
6808:
6809: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
6810: %
6811: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
6812: %
6813: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
6814: {%
6815: \makevalueexpandable
6816: \setupverbatim
6817: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
6818: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
6819: \input #1
6820: \afterenvbreak
6821: }%
6822: }
6823:
6824: % @copying ... @end copying.
6825: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
6826: %
6827: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
6828: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
6829: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
6830: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
6831: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
6832: % possible is very desirable.
6833: %
6834: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
6835: \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
6836: %
6837: \def\insertcopying{%
6838: \begingroup
6839: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
6840: \scanexp\copyingtext
6841: \endgroup
6842: }
6843:
6844:
6845: \message{defuns,}
6846: % @defun etc.
6847:
6848: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
6849: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
6850: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
6851: \newcount\defunpenalty
6852:
6853: % Start the processing of @deffn:
6854: \def\startdefun{%
6855: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
6856: \medbreak
6857: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
6858: % following @def command, see below.
6859: \else
6860: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
6861: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
6862: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
6863: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
6864: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
6865: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
6866: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
6867: %
6868: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
6869: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
6870: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
6871: % @def command.
6872: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6873: %
6874: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
6875: % But do insert the glue.
6876: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
6877: \fi
6878: %
6879: \parindent=0in
6880: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
6881: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6882: }
6883:
6884: \def\dodefunx#1{%
6885: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
6886: \checkenv#1%
6887: %
6888: % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
6889: % It's not a great place, though.
6890: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6891: %
6892: % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
6893: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
6894: }
6895: \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
6896:
6897: % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
6898: %
6899: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
6900: \begingroup
6901: % call \deffnheader:
6902: #1#2 \endheader
6903: % common ending:
6904: \interlinepenalty = 10000
6905: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
6906: \endgraf
6907: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
6908: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
6909: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
6910: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
6911: \checkparencounts
6912: \endgroup
6913: }
6914:
6915: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
6916:
6917: % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
6918: % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
6919: %
6920: \def\makedefun#1{%
6921: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
6922: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
6923: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
6924: \temp
6925: }
6926:
6927: % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
6928: %
6929: % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
6930: % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
6931: %
6932: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
6933: \envdef#1{%
6934: \startdefun
6935: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
6936: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
6937: }%
6938: \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
6939: \def#3%
6940: }
6941:
6942: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
6943: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
6944:
6945: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
6946: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
6947: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
6948: %
6949: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
6950: \def\temp{#1}%
6951: \ifx\temp\onword
6952: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6953: = \empty
6954: \else\ifx\temp\offword
6955: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6956: = \relax
6957: \else
6958: \errhelp = \EMsimple
6959: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
6960: must be on|off}%
6961: \fi\fi
6962: }
6963:
6964: % Untyped functions:
6965:
6966: % @deffn category name args
6967: \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
6968:
6969: % @deffn category class name args
6970: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6971:
6972: % \defopon {category on}class name args
6973: \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6974:
6975: % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
6976: %
6977: \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
6978: % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
6979: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
6980: \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
6981: }
6982:
6983: % Typed functions:
6984:
6985: % @deftypefn category type name args
6986: \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
6987:
6988: % @deftypeop category class type name args
6989: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6990:
6991: % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
6992: \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6993:
6994: % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
6995: %
6996: \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6997: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6998: \doingtypefntrue
6999: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7000: }
7001:
7002: % Typed variables:
7003:
7004: % @deftypevr category type var args
7005: \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
7006:
7007: % @deftypecv category class type var args
7008: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
7009:
7010: % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
7011: \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
7012:
7013: % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
7014: %
7015: \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
7016: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
7017: \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7018: }
7019:
7020: % Untyped variables:
7021:
7022: % @defvr category var args
7023: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
7024:
7025: % @defcv category class var args
7026: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
7027:
7028: % \defcvof {category of}class var args
7029: \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
7030:
7031: % Types:
7032:
7033: % @deftp category name args
7034: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
7035: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
7036: \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
7037: }
7038:
7039: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
7040: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7041: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
7042: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
7043: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7044: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7045: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
7046: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7047: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
7048: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
7049: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7050: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7051:
7052: % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
7053: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
7054: % #2 is the return type, if any.
7055: % #3 is the function name.
7056: %
7057: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
7058: %
7059: \def\defname#1#2#3{%
7060: \par
7061: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
7062: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
7063: %
7064: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
7065: % on a line by itself.
7066: \rettypeownlinefalse
7067: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
7068: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
7069: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
7070: \rettypeownlinetrue
7071: \fi
7072: \fi
7073: %
7074: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
7075: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
7076: % just below it.
7077: \def\temp{#1}%
7078: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
7079: %
7080: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
7081: % least two.
7082: \tempnum = 2
7083: %
7084: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
7085: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
7086: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
7087: %
7088: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
7089: \ifrettypeownline
7090: \advance\tempnum by 1
7091: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
7092: \else
7093: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
7094: \fi
7095: %
7096: % The continuations:
7097: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
7098: %
7099: % The final paragraph shape:
7100: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
7101: %
7102: % Put the category name at the right margin.
7103: \noindent
7104: \hbox to 0pt{%
7105: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
7106: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
7107: \kern\leftskip
7108: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
7109: }%
7110: %
7111: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
7112: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
7113: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
7114: {%
7115: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
7116: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
7117: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
7118: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
7119: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
7120: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
7121: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
7122: % one has made identifiers using them :).
7123: \df \tt
7124: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
7125: \ifx\temp\empty\else
7126: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7127: \ifrettypeownline
7128: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7129: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
7130: \else
7131: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7132: \fi
7133: \fi % no return type
7134: #3% output function name
7135: }%
7136: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
7137: %
7138: \boldbrax
7139: % arguments will be output next, if any.
7140: }
7141:
7142: % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
7143: % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
7144: % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
7145: % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
7146: %
7147: \def\defunargs#1{%
7148: % use sl by default (not ttsl),
7149: % tt for the names.
7150: \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
7151: %
7152: % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
7153: % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
7154: % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
7155: % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
7156: % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
7157: \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
7158: #1%
7159: \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
7160: }
7161:
7162: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7163: %
7164: \def\activeparens{%
7165: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
7166: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
7167: \catcode`\&=\active
7168: }
7169:
7170: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7171: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
7172:
7173: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
7174: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7175: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7176: {
7177: \activeparens
7178: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
7179: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
7180: \global\let& = \&
7181:
7182: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
7183: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
7184: }
7185:
7186: \newcount\parencount
7187:
7188: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7189: \newif\ifampseen
7190: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
7191:
7192: \def\parenfont{%
7193: \ifampseen
7194: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7195: % otherwise use the default font.
7196: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
7197: \else
7198: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7199: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7200: \sf
7201: \fi
7202: }
7203: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
7204: \ifampseen
7205: \ifnum\parencount=1
7206: #1%
7207: \fi
7208: \fi
7209: }
7210: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7211:
7212: \def\opnr{%
7213: \global\advance\parencount by 1
7214: {\parenfont(}%
7215: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7216: }
7217: \def\clnr{%
7218: {\parenfont)}%
7219: \infirstlevel \sl
7220: \global\advance\parencount by -1
7221: }
7222:
7223: \newcount\brackcount
7224: \def\lbrb{%
7225: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
7226: {\bf[}%
7227: }
7228: \def\rbrb{%
7229: {\bf]}%
7230: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
7231: }
7232:
7233: \def\checkparencounts{%
7234: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
7235: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7236: }
7237: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7238: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
7239: \def\badparencount{%
7240: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
7241: \global\parencount=0
7242: }
7243: \def\badbrackcount{%
7244: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
7245: \global\brackcount=0
7246: }
7247:
7248:
7249: \message{macros,}
7250: % @macro.
7251:
7252: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
7253: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
7254: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7255: \newwrite\macscribble
7256: \def\scantokens#1{%
7257: \toks0={#1}%
7258: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
7259: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
7260: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
7261: \input \jobname.tmp
7262: }
7263: \fi
7264:
7265: \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
7266: \newlinechar`\^^M
7267: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
7268: %
7269: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
7270: % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
7271: % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
7272: % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
7273: % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
7274: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
7275: %
7276: % ... and for \example:
7277: \spaceisspace
7278: %
7279: % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
7280: % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
7281: % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
7282: % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
7283: % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
7284: % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
7285: % line-oriented commands.
7286: %
7287: \scantokens{#1\empty}%
7288: \endgroup}
7289:
7290: \def\scanexp#1{%
7291: \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
7292: \temp
7293: }
7294:
7295: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
7296: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
7297: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
7298:
7299: % List of all defined macros in the form
7300: % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
7301: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
7302: % if there is a need.
7303: \def\macrolist{}
7304:
7305: % Add the macro to \macrolist
7306: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
7307: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
7308: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
7309: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
7310: }
7311:
7312: % Utility routines.
7313: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
7314: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
7315: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
7316: %
7317: \def\cslet#1#2{%
7318: \expandafter\let
7319: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
7320: \csname#2\endcsname
7321: }
7322:
7323: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
7324: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
7325: {\catcode`\@=11
7326: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
7327: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
7328: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
7329: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
7330: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
7331: }
7332:
7333: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
7334: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
7335: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
7336: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
7337: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
7338: }
7339:
7340: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
7341: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
7342: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
7343: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
7344: %
7345: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
7346: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
7347: % confine the change to the current group.
7348: %
7349: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
7350: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
7351: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
7352: %
7353: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
7354: \catcode`\"=\other
7355: \catcode`\+=\other
7356: \catcode`\<=\other
7357: \catcode`\>=\other
7358: \catcode`\@=\other
7359: \catcode`\^=\other
7360: \catcode`\_=\other
7361: \catcode`\|=\other
7362: \catcode`\~=\other
7363: \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
7364: }
7365:
7366: \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
7367: \scanctxt
7368: \catcode`\\=\other
7369: \catcode`\^^M=\other
7370: }
7371:
7372: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
7373: \scanctxt
7374: \catcode`\{=\other
7375: \catcode`\}=\other
7376: \catcode`\^^M=\other
7377: \usembodybackslash
7378: }
7379:
7380: \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
7381: \scanctxt
7382: \catcode`\\=0
7383: }
7384: % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
7385: % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
7386: % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
7387: %
7388: % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
7389: % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
7390: % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
7391: %
7392: \def\\{\normalbackslash}%
7393: %
7394: % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
7395: % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
7396: % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
7397: %
7398: % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
7399:
7400:
7401: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
7402: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
7403: % where N is the macro parameter number.
7404: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
7405: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
7406: %
7407: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
7408: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
7409: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
7410: }
7411: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
7412:
7413: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
7414:
7415: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
7416: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
7417:
7418: \def\macroxxx#1{%
7419: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
7420: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
7421: \paramno=0\relax
7422: \else
7423: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
7424: \if\paramno>256\relax
7425: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7426: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7427: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
7428: \fi
7429: \fi
7430: \fi
7431: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
7432: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
7433: \else
7434: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
7435: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
7436: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
7437: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
7438: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
7439: \fi
7440: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
7441: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
7442: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
7443: \fi}
7444:
7445: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
7446: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
7447: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
7448: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
7449: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
7450: \begingroup
7451: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
7452: \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
7453: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
7454: \endgroup
7455: \else
7456: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
7457: \fi
7458: }
7459:
7460: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
7461: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
7462: %
7463: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
7464: \ifx #1\relax
7465: % remove this
7466: \else
7467: \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
7468: \fi
7469: }
7470:
7471: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
7472: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
7473: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
7474: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
7475: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
7476: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
7477: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
7478:
7479: % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
7480: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
7481: \catcode `@=11\relax
7482:
7483: % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
7484: % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
7485: % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If
7486: % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
7487: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
7488: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
7489: %
7490: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
7491: %
7492: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
7493: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
7494: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
7495: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
7496: %
7497: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
7498: % the macro is used.
7499: %
7500: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
7501: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
7502: % processed again to replace the arguments.
7503: %
7504: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
7505: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
7506: % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
7507: %
7508: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
7509: % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
7510: % error is produced.
7511: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
7512: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
7513: \let\hash\relax
7514: \let\xeatspaces\relax
7515: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
7516: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
7517: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
7518: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
7519: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
7520: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
7521: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
7522: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
7523: \paramno0\relax
7524: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
7525: \fi
7526: }
7527: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
7528: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7529: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
7530: \advance\paramno by 1
7531: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
7532: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
7533: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
7534: \fi\next}
7535:
7536: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
7537: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7538: \else
7539: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
7540: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
7541: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
7542: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
7543: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
7544: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
7545: % \xdef .
7546: \expandafter\edef\tempa
7547: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
7548: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7549: \fi\next}
7550:
7551: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
7552: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
7553: %
7554:
7555: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
7556: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
7557: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7558: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
7559: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7560: \catcode `\@=11\relax
7561:
7562: \let\endargs@\relax
7563: \let\nil@\relax
7564: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
7565: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
7566:
7567: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
7568: % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
7569: % macarg.ARGNAME
7570: %
7571: % #1 is the macro name
7572: % #2 is the list of argument names
7573: % #3 is the list of argument values
7574: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
7575: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
7576: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
7577: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
7578: \def\macroname{#1}%
7579: \begingroup
7580: \macroargctxt
7581: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
7582: \def\@tempa{#3}%
7583: \ifx\@tempa\empty
7584: \setemptyargvalues@
7585: \else
7586: \getargvals@@
7587: \fi
7588: }
7589:
7590: %
7591: \def\getargvals@@{%
7592: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7593: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
7594: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7595: \else
7596: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7597: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
7598: \fi
7599: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7600: \else
7601: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7602: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
7603: % macros to empty.
7604: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7605: \else
7606: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
7607: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
7608: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
7609: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
7610: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
7611: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
7612: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
7613: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
7614: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7615: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
7616: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
7617: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
7618: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
7619: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
7620: \let\next\getargvals@@
7621: \fi
7622: \fi
7623: \next
7624: }
7625:
7626: \def\push@#1#2{%
7627: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
7628: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
7629: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
7630: \expandafter#1#2}%
7631: }
7632:
7633: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
7634: % in macro \@tempa
7635: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
7636: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
7637: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
7638: % values into respective token registers.
7639: %
7640: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
7641: \begingroup
7642: \paramno0\relax
7643: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
7644: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
7645: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
7646: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
7647: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
7648: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
7649: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
7650: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
7651: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
7652: % group.
7653: \expandafter
7654: \endgroup
7655: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7656: }
7657:
7658: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
7659: %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
7660: \expandafter
7661: \endgroup
7662: \macargdeflist@
7663: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
7664: % is in \@tempa .
7665: \macvalstoargs@
7666: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
7667: % with \@tempb .
7668: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
7669: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
7670: % \egroup .
7671: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
7672: \let\@tempc\relax
7673: \else
7674: \let\@tempc\egroup
7675: \fi
7676: % And now we do the real job:
7677: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
7678: \@tempd
7679: }
7680:
7681: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
7682: \if#1;\let\next\relax
7683: \else
7684: \let\next\putargsintokens@
7685: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
7686: % alias \@tempb .
7687: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
7688: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
7689: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
7690: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
7691: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7692: \fi
7693: \next
7694: }
7695:
7696: % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
7697: \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
7698: % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
7699: \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
7700: % newtoks that can be used non \outer .
7701: \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
7702:
7703: % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
7704: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
7705: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7706: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7707: \else
7708: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
7709: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7710: \fi
7711: \next
7712: }
7713:
7714: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
7715: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
7716: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
7717: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
7718: \def\paramlist{#2}%
7719: }
7720:
7721: % #1 is the element target macro
7722: % #2 is the list macro
7723: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
7724: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7725: \def#1{#3}%
7726: \def#2{#4}%
7727: }
7728: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7729: \long\def#1{#3}%
7730: \long\def#2{#4}%
7731: }
7732:
7733: % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
7734: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
7735: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
7736: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
7737: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
7738: %
7739: \def\defmacro{%
7740: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
7741: \ifrecursive
7742: \ifcase\paramno
7743: % 0
7744: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7745: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7746: \or % 1
7747: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7748: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7749: \noexpand\braceorline
7750: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7751: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7752: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7753: \else
7754: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
7755: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7756: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7757: \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7758: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7759: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7760: \expandafter\expandafter
7761: \expandafter\xdef
7762: \expandafter\expandafter
7763: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7764: \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7765: \else % 10 or more
7766: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7767: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7768: }%
7769: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7770: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
7771: \fi
7772: \fi
7773: \else
7774: \ifcase\paramno
7775: % 0
7776: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7777: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7778: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7779: \or % 1
7780: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7781: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7782: \noexpand\braceorline
7783: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7784: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7785: \egroup
7786: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7787: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7788: \else % at most 9
7789: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
7790: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7791: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7792: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7793: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7794: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7795: \expandafter\expandafter
7796: \expandafter\xdef
7797: \expandafter\expandafter
7798: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7799: \paramlist{%
7800: \egroup
7801: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7802: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7803: \else % 10 or more:
7804: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7805: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7806: }%
7807: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7808: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
7809: \fi
7810: \fi
7811: \fi}
7812:
7813: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
7814:
7815: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
7816:
7817: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
7818: % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
7819: % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
7820: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
7821: %
7822: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
7823: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
7824: \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
7825: \expandafter\parsearg
7826: \fi \macnamexxx}
7827:
7828:
7829: % @alias.
7830: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
7831: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
7832: %
7833: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
7834: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
7835: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
7836: {%
7837: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
7838: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
7839: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
7840: }%
7841: \next
7842: }
7843:
7844:
7845: \message{cross references,}
7846:
7847: \newwrite\auxfile
7848: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
7849: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
7850:
7851: % @inforef is relatively simple.
7852: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
7853: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
7854: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
7855: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
7856:
7857: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
7858: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
7859: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
7860: % @node foo , bar , ...
7861: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
7862: %
7863: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
7864: %
7865: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
7866: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
7867: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
7868: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
7869:
7870: \let\nwnode=\node
7871: \let\lastnode=\empty
7872:
7873: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
7874: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
7875: %
7876: \def\donoderef#1{%
7877: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
7878: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
7879: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
7880: \fi
7881: }
7882:
7883: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
7884: %
7885: \newcount\savesfregister
7886: %
7887: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
7888: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
7889: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
7890:
7891: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
7892: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
7893: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
7894: % or the anchor name.
7895: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
7896: % empty for anchors.
7897: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
7898: %
7899: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
7900: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
7901: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
7902: %
7903: \def\setref#1#2{%
7904: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
7905: \iflinks
7906: {%
7907: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
7908: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
7909: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
7910: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
7911: }%
7912: \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
7913: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
7914: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
7915: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
7916: }%
7917: \fi
7918: }
7919:
7920: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
7921: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
7922: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
7923: % variable, now it's official.
7924: %
7925: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
7926: \def\temp{#1}%
7927: \ifx\temp\onword
7928: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7929: = \empty
7930: \else\ifx\temp\offword
7931: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7932: = \relax
7933: \else
7934: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7935: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
7936: must be on|off}%
7937: \fi\fi
7938: }
7939:
7940: %
7941: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
7942: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
7943: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
7944: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
7945: %
7946: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7947: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7948: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7949: %
7950: \newbox\toprefbox
7951: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
7952: \newbox\infofilenamebox
7953: \newbox\printedmanualbox
7954: %
7955: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
7956: \unsepspaces
7957: %
7958: % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
7959: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
7960: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
7961: %
7962: \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
7963: \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
7964: %
7965: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
7966: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
7967: %
7968: % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
7969: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
7970: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7971: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
7972: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
7973: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
7974: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7975: \else
7976: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
7977: % the square brackets if we have it.
7978: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7979: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
7980: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7981: \else
7982: \ifhavexrefs
7983: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
7984: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
7985: \else
7986: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
7987: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7988: \fi%
7989: \fi
7990: \fi
7991: \fi
7992: %
7993: % Make link in pdf output.
7994: \ifpdf
7995: {\indexnofonts
7996: \turnoffactive
7997: \makevalueexpandable
7998: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
7999: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
8000: % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
8001: \getfilename{#4}%
8002: %
8003: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
8004: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
8005: \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
8006: \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
8007: \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
8008: \else
8009: \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
8010: \fi
8011: %
8012: \leavevmode
8013: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
8014: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
8015: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
8016: \else
8017: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
8018: \fi
8019: }%
8020: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
8021: \fi
8022: %
8023: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
8024: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
8025: % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
8026: {%
8027: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
8028: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
8029: \indexnofonts
8030: \turnoffactive
8031: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
8032: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
8033: }%
8034: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
8035: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
8036: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
8037: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
8038: \refx{#1-snt}{}%
8039: \else
8040: \printedrefname
8041: \fi
8042: %
8043: % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
8044: % "in MANUALNAME".
8045: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
8046: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
8047: \fi
8048: \else
8049: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
8050: %
8051: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
8052: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
8053: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
8054: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
8055: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
8056: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
8057: %
8058: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
8059: % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
8060: %
8061: \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
8062: %
8063: \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
8064: % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
8065: % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
8066: % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
8067: %
8068: \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
8069: %
8070: \else
8071: % Reference within this manual.
8072: %
8073: % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
8074: % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
8075: % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
8076: % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
8077: % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
8078: {\turnoffactive
8079: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
8080: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
8081: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
8082: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
8083: }%
8084: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
8085: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
8086: %
8087: % But we always want a comma and a space:
8088: ,\space
8089: %
8090: % output the `page 3'.
8091: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
8092: \fi\fi
8093: \fi
8094: \endlink
8095: \endgroup}
8096:
8097: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
8098: %
8099: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
8100: % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
8101: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
8102: %
8103: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
8104: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
8105: % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
8106: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
8107: % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
8108: %
8109: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
8110: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
8111: %
8112: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
8113: \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
8114: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
8115: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
8116: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
8117: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
8118: \fi
8119: \fi
8120: #1%
8121: }
8122:
8123: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
8124: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
8125: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
8126: % one that Bob is working on :).
8127: %
8128: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
8129:
8130: % Things referred to by \setref.
8131: %
8132: \def\Ynothing{}
8133: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
8134: \def\Ynumbered{%
8135: \ifnum\secno=0
8136: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
8137: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8138: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
8139: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8140: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8141: \else
8142: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8143: \fi\fi\fi
8144: }
8145: \def\Yappendix{%
8146: \ifnum\secno=0
8147: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
8148: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8149: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
8150: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8151: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8152: \else
8153: \putwordSection@tie
8154: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8155: \fi\fi\fi
8156: }
8157:
8158: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
8159: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
8160: %
8161: \def\refx#1#2{%
8162: {%
8163: \indexnofonts
8164: \otherbackslash
8165: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
8166: \csname XR#1\endcsname
8167: }%
8168: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
8169: % If not defined, say something at least.
8170: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
8171: \iflinks
8172: \ifhavexrefs
8173: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
8174: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
8175: \else
8176: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
8177: \global\warnedxrefstrue
8178: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
8179: \fi
8180: \fi
8181: \fi
8182: \else
8183: % It's defined, so just use it.
8184: \thisrefX
8185: \fi
8186: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
8187: }
8188:
8189: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
8190: % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
8191: % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
8192: %
8193: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
8194: {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
8195: % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
8196: % mess up the control sequence name.
8197: \indexnofonts
8198: \turnoffactive
8199: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
8200: }%
8201: %
8202: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
8203: %
8204: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
8205: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
8206: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
8207: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
8208: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
8209: %
8210: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
8211: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
8212: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
8213: \else
8214: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
8215: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
8216: \fi
8217: %
8218: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
8219: % for later use in \listoffloats.
8220: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
8221: {\safexrefname}}%
8222: \fi
8223: }
8224:
8225: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
8226: %
8227: \def\tryauxfile{%
8228: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
8229: \ifeof 1 \else
8230: \readdatafile{aux}%
8231: \global\havexrefstrue
8232: \fi
8233: \closein 1
8234: }
8235:
8236: \def\setupdatafile{%
8237: \catcode`\^^@=\other
8238: \catcode`\^^A=\other
8239: \catcode`\^^B=\other
8240: \catcode`\^^C=\other
8241: \catcode`\^^D=\other
8242: \catcode`\^^E=\other
8243: \catcode`\^^F=\other
8244: \catcode`\^^G=\other
8245: \catcode`\^^H=\other
8246: \catcode`\^^K=\other
8247: \catcode`\^^L=\other
8248: \catcode`\^^N=\other
8249: \catcode`\^^P=\other
8250: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
8251: \catcode`\^^R=\other
8252: \catcode`\^^S=\other
8253: \catcode`\^^T=\other
8254: \catcode`\^^U=\other
8255: \catcode`\^^V=\other
8256: \catcode`\^^W=\other
8257: \catcode`\^^X=\other
8258: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
8259: \catcode`\^^[=\other
8260: \catcode`\^^\=\other
8261: \catcode`\^^]=\other
8262: \catcode`\^^^=\other
8263: \catcode`\^^_=\other
8264: % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
8265: % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
8266: % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
8267: % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
8268: % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
8269: % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
8270: % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
8271: % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
8272: %
8273: % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
8274: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
8275: % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
8276: %
8277: \catcode`\^=\other
8278: %
8279: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
8280: \catcode`\~=\other
8281: \catcode`\[=\other
8282: \catcode`\]=\other
8283: \catcode`\"=\other
8284: \catcode`\_=\other
8285: \catcode`\|=\other
8286: \catcode`\<=\other
8287: \catcode`\>=\other
8288: \catcode`\$=\other
8289: \catcode`\#=\other
8290: \catcode`\&=\other
8291: \catcode`\%=\other
8292: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
8293: %
8294: % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
8295: % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
8296: % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
8297: % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
8298: % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
8299: % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
8300: % now. --karl, 15jan04.
8301: \catcode`\\=\other
8302: %
8303: % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
8304: {%
8305: \count1=128
8306: \def\loop{%
8307: \catcode\count1=\other
8308: \advance\count1 by 1
8309: \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
8310: }%
8311: }%
8312: %
8313: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
8314: \catcode`\{=1
8315: \catcode`\}=2
8316: \catcode`\@=0
8317: }
8318:
8319: \def\readdatafile#1{%
8320: \begingroup
8321: \setupdatafile
8322: \input\jobname.#1
8323: \endgroup}
8324:
8325:
8326: \message{insertions,}
8327: % including footnotes.
8328:
8329: \newcount \footnoteno
8330:
8331: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
8332: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
8333: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
8334: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
8335: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
8336: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
8337:
8338: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
8339: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
8340:
8341: {\catcode `\@=11
8342: %
8343: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
8344: \gdef\footnote{%
8345: \let\indent=\ptexindent
8346: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
8347: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
8348: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
8349: %
8350: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
8351: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
8352: \let\@sf\empty
8353: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
8354: %
8355: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
8356: \unskip
8357: \thisfootno\@sf
8358: \dofootnote
8359: }%
8360:
8361: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
8362: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
8363: %
8364: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
8365: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
8366: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
8367: %
8368: \gdef\dofootnote{%
8369: \insert\footins\bgroup
8370: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
8371: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
8372: % So reset some parameters.
8373: \hsize=\pagewidth
8374: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
8375: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
8376: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
8377: \floatingpenalty\@MM
8378: \leftskip\z@skip
8379: \rightskip\z@skip
8380: \spaceskip\z@skip
8381: \xspaceskip\z@skip
8382: \parindent\defaultparindent
8383: %
8384: \smallfonts \rm
8385: %
8386: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
8387: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
8388: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
8389: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
8390: \let\noindent = \relax
8391: %
8392: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
8393: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
8394: \everypar = {\hang}%
8395: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
8396: %
8397: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
8398: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
8399: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
8400: \footstrut
8401: %
8402: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
8403: \futurelet\next\fo@t
8404: }
8405: }%end \catcode `\@=11
8406:
8407: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
8408: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
8409: % would be lost.
8410: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
8411: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
8412: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
8413:
8414: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
8415: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
8416: % out prematurely.
8417: %
8418: \def\startsavinginserts{%
8419: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
8420: \let\insert\saveinsert
8421: \else
8422: \let\checkinserts\relax
8423: \fi
8424: }
8425:
8426: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
8427: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
8428: %
8429: \def\saveinsert#1{%
8430: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
8431: \afterassignment\next
8432: % swallow the left brace
8433: \let\temp =
8434: }
8435: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
8436: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
8437:
8438: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
8439:
8440: \def\placesaveins#1{%
8441: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
8442: {\box#1}%
8443: }
8444:
8445: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
8446: {
8447: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
8448: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
8449: }
8450:
8451: % initialization:
8452: \def\newsaveins #1{%
8453: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
8454: \next
8455: }
8456: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
8457: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
8458: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
8459: \checksaveins #1}%
8460: }
8461:
8462: % initialize:
8463: \let\checkinserts\empty
8464: \newsaveins\footins
8465: \newsaveins\margin
8466:
8467:
8468: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
8469: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
8470: %
8471: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
8472: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
8473: % undone and the next image would fail.
8474: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
8475: \ifeof 1 \else
8476: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
8477: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
8478: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
8479: \input epsf.tex
8480: \fi
8481: \closein 1
8482: %
8483: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
8484: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
8485: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
8486: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
8487: it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
8488: %
8489: \def\image#1{%
8490: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
8491: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
8492: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
8493: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
8494: \global\warnednoepsftrue
8495: \fi
8496: \else
8497: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
8498: \fi
8499: }
8500: %
8501: % Arguments to @image:
8502: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
8503: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
8504: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
8505: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
8506: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
8507: \newif\ifimagevmode
8508: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
8509: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
8510: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
8511: % If the image is by itself, center it.
8512: \ifvmode
8513: \imagevmodetrue
8514: \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
8515: % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
8516: \imagevmodetrue
8517: \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
8518: \fi\fi
8519: %
8520: \ifimagevmode
8521: \nobreak\medskip
8522: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
8523: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
8524: % above and below.
8525: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
8526: \nobreak
8527: \fi
8528: %
8529: % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
8530: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
8531: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
8532: % normal paragraph indentation.
8533: % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
8534: % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
8535: % eradicate the centering.
8536: \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
8537: %
8538: % Output the image.
8539: \ifpdf
8540: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
8541: \else
8542: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
8543: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
8544: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
8545: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
8546: \fi
8547: %
8548: \ifimagevmode
8549: \medskip % space after a standalone image
8550: \fi
8551: \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
8552: \endgroup}
8553:
8554:
8555: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
8556: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
8557: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
8558: %
8559: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
8560:
8561: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
8562: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
8563:
8564: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
8565: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
8566: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
8567: %
8568: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
8569: % be referable.
8570: %
8571: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
8572: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
8573: %
8574: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
8575: % chapter-level command.
8576: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
8577: %
8578: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
8579: \let\thiscaption=\empty
8580: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
8581: %
8582: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
8583: %
8584: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
8585: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
8586: %
8587: \startsavinginserts
8588: %
8589: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
8590: \par
8591: %
8592: \vtop\bgroup
8593: \def\floattype{#1}%
8594: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
8595: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
8596: %
8597: \ifx\floattype\empty
8598: \let\safefloattype=\empty
8599: \else
8600: {%
8601: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8602: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8603: \indexnofonts
8604: \turnoffactive
8605: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8606: }%
8607: \fi
8608: %
8609: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
8610: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8611: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
8612: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
8613: %
8614: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
8615: \global\advance\floatno by 1
8616: %
8617: {%
8618: % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
8619: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
8620: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
8621: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
8622: % lists of floats.
8623: %
8624: \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
8625: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
8626: }%
8627: \fi
8628: %
8629: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
8630: \vskip\parskip
8631: %
8632: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
8633: \restorefirstparagraphindent
8634: }
8635:
8636: % we have these possibilities:
8637: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
8638: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
8639: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
8640: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
8641: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
8642: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
8643: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
8644: % @float & no caption:
8645: %
8646: \def\Efloat{%
8647: \let\floatident = \empty
8648: %
8649: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
8650: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
8651: %
8652: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
8653: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8654: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
8655: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
8656: \fi
8657: % the number.
8658: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8659: \fi
8660: %
8661: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
8662: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
8663: \let\captionline = \floatident
8664: %
8665: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
8666: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
8667: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
8668: \fi
8669: %
8670: % caption text.
8671: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
8672: \fi
8673: %
8674: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
8675: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
8676: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
8677: \vskip.5\parskip
8678: \captionline
8679: %
8680: % Space below caption.
8681: \vskip\parskip
8682: \fi
8683: %
8684: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
8685: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
8686: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8687: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
8688: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
8689: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
8690: {%
8691: \atdummies
8692: %
8693: % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
8694: % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
8695: % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
8696: \scanexp{%
8697: \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
8698: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
8699: \thiscaption
8700: \else
8701: \thisshortcaption
8702: \fi
8703: }%
8704: }%
8705: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
8706: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
8707: }%
8708: \fi
8709: \egroup % end of \vtop
8710: %
8711: % place the captured inserts
8712: %
8713: % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
8714: % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
8715: % float. --kasal, 26may04
8716: %
8717: \checkinserts
8718: }
8719:
8720: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
8721: %
8722: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
8723: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
8724: }
8725:
8726: % @caption, @shortcaption
8727: %
8728: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
8729: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
8730: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
8731: \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
8732:
8733: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
8734: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
8735: \def\getfloatno#1{%
8736: \ifx#1\relax
8737: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
8738: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
8739: %
8740: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
8741: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
8742: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
8743: \fi
8744: \let\floatno#1%
8745: }
8746:
8747: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
8748: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
8749: % first read the @float command.
8750: %
8751: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8752:
8753: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
8754: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
8755: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
8756:
8757: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
8758: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
8759: % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
8760: %
8761: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
8762: %
8763: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
8764: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
8765: %
8766: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
8767: \def\temp{#1}%
8768: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
8769: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
8770: }
8771:
8772: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
8773: %
8774: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
8775: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
8776: {%
8777: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8778: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8779: \indexnofonts
8780: \turnoffactive
8781: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8782: }%
8783: %
8784: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
8785: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
8786: \ifhavexrefs
8787: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
8788: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
8789: \fi
8790: \else
8791: \begingroup
8792: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
8793: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
8794: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
8795: \endgroup
8796: \fi
8797: }
8798:
8799: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
8800: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
8801: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
8802: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
8803: %
8804: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
8805: % they won't appear in the aux file).
8806: %
8807: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
8808: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
8809: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
8810: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
8811: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
8812: % in pdf output.
8813: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
8814: %
8815: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
8816: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
8817: \writeentry
8818: }}
8819:
8820:
8821: \message{localization,}
8822:
8823: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
8824: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
8825: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
8826: %
8827: {
8828: \catcode`\_ = \active
8829: \globaldefs=1
8830: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
8831: \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
8832: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
8833: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
8834: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8835: \ifeof 1
8836: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
8837: \else
8838: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8839: \input txi-#1.tex
8840: \fi
8841: \closein 1
8842: \endgroup % end raw TeX
8843: \endgroup}
8844: %
8845: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
8846: % try txi-de.tex.
8847: %
8848: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
8849: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8850: \ifeof 1
8851: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
8852: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
8853: \else
8854: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8855: \input txi-#1.tex
8856: \fi
8857: \closein 1
8858: }
8859: }% end of special _ catcode
8860: %
8861: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
8862: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
8863: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
8864:
8865: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
8866: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
8867: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
8868: %
8869: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
8870: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
8871: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
8872: %
8873: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
8874: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
8875: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
8876: % accented characters problem.)
8877: %
8878: \catcode`@=11
8879: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
8880: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
8881: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
8882: \message{no patterns for #1}%
8883: \else
8884: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
8885: \fi
8886: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
8887: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
8888: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
8889: }
8890:
8891: % Helpers for encodings.
8892: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
8893: %
8894: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
8895: \count255=128
8896: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8897: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
8898: \advance\count255 by 1
8899: \repeat
8900: }
8901:
8902: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
8903: \count255=128
8904: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8905: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
8906: \advance\count255 by 1
8907: \repeat
8908: }
8909:
8910: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
8911: % according to the specified encoding.
8912: %
8913: \parseargdef\documentencoding{%
8914: % Encoding being declared for the document.
8915: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
8916: %
8917: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
8918: % to compare them with \ifx.
8919: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
8920: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
8921: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
8922: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
8923: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
8924: %
8925: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
8926: \asciichardefs
8927: %
8928: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
8929: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8930: \lattwochardefs
8931: %
8932: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
8933: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8934: \latonechardefs
8935: %
8936: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
8937: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8938: \latninechardefs
8939: %
8940: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
8941: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8942: \utfeightchardefs
8943: %
8944: \else
8945: \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
8946: %
8947: \fi % utfeight
8948: \fi % latnine
8949: \fi % latone
8950: \fi % lattwo
8951: \fi % ascii
8952: }
8953:
8954: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
8955: % the default font encoding (OT1).
8956: %
8957: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
8958:
8959: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
8960: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
8961:
8962: % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
8963: % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
8964: % macros containing the character definitions.
8965: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8966: %
8967: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
8968: \def\latonechardefs{%
8969: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
8970: \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
8971: \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
8972: \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
8973: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8974: \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
8975: \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
8976: \gdef^^a7{\S}
8977: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8978: \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
8979: \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
8980: \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
8981: \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
8982: \gdef^^ad{\-}
8983: \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
8984: \gdef^^af{\={}}
8985: %
8986: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8987: \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
8988: \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
8989: \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
8990: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8991: \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
8992: \gdef^^b6{\P}
8993: %
8994: \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
8995: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8996: \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
8997: \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
8998: %
8999: \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
9000: \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
9001: \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
9002: \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
9003: \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
9004: %
9005: \gdef^^c0{\`A}
9006: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
9007: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
9008: \gdef^^c3{\~A}
9009: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
9010: \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
9011: \gdef^^c6{\AE}
9012: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
9013: \gdef^^c8{\`E}
9014: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
9015: \gdef^^ca{\^E}
9016: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
9017: \gdef^^cc{\`I}
9018: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
9019: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
9020: \gdef^^cf{\"I}
9021: %
9022: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
9023: \gdef^^d1{\~N}
9024: \gdef^^d2{\`O}
9025: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
9026: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
9027: \gdef^^d5{\~O}
9028: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
9029: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
9030: \gdef^^d8{\O}
9031: \gdef^^d9{\`U}
9032: \gdef^^da{\'U}
9033: \gdef^^db{\^U}
9034: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
9035: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
9036: \gdef^^de{\TH}
9037: \gdef^^df{\ss}
9038: %
9039: \gdef^^e0{\`a}
9040: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
9041: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
9042: \gdef^^e3{\~a}
9043: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
9044: \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
9045: \gdef^^e6{\ae}
9046: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
9047: \gdef^^e8{\`e}
9048: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
9049: \gdef^^ea{\^e}
9050: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
9051: \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
9052: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
9053: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
9054: \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
9055: %
9056: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
9057: \gdef^^f1{\~n}
9058: \gdef^^f2{\`o}
9059: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
9060: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
9061: \gdef^^f5{\~o}
9062: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
9063: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
9064: \gdef^^f8{\o}
9065: \gdef^^f9{\`u}
9066: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
9067: \gdef^^fb{\^u}
9068: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
9069: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
9070: \gdef^^fe{\th}
9071: \gdef^^ff{\"y}
9072: }
9073:
9074: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
9075: \def\latninechardefs{%
9076: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
9077: \latonechardefs
9078: %
9079: \gdef^^a4{\euro}
9080: \gdef^^a6{\v S}
9081: \gdef^^a8{\v s}
9082: \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
9083: \gdef^^b8{\v z}
9084: \gdef^^bc{\OE}
9085: \gdef^^bd{\oe}
9086: \gdef^^be{\"Y}
9087: }
9088:
9089: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
9090: \def\lattwochardefs{%
9091: \gdef^^a0{\tie}
9092: \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
9093: \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
9094: \gdef^^a3{\L}
9095: \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
9096: \gdef^^a5{\v L}
9097: \gdef^^a6{\'S}
9098: \gdef^^a7{\S}
9099: \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
9100: \gdef^^a9{\v S}
9101: \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
9102: \gdef^^ab{\v T}
9103: \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
9104: \gdef^^ad{\-}
9105: \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
9106: \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
9107: %
9108: \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
9109: \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
9110: \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
9111: \gdef^^b3{\l}
9112: \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
9113: \gdef^^b5{\v l}
9114: \gdef^^b6{\'s}
9115: \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
9116: \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
9117: \gdef^^b9{\v s}
9118: \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
9119: \gdef^^bb{\v t}
9120: \gdef^^bc{\'z}
9121: \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
9122: \gdef^^be{\v z}
9123: \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
9124: %
9125: \gdef^^c0{\'R}
9126: \gdef^^c1{\'A}
9127: \gdef^^c2{\^A}
9128: \gdef^^c3{\u A}
9129: \gdef^^c4{\"A}
9130: \gdef^^c5{\'L}
9131: \gdef^^c6{\'C}
9132: \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
9133: \gdef^^c8{\v C}
9134: \gdef^^c9{\'E}
9135: \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
9136: \gdef^^cb{\"E}
9137: \gdef^^cc{\v E}
9138: \gdef^^cd{\'I}
9139: \gdef^^ce{\^I}
9140: \gdef^^cf{\v D}
9141: %
9142: \gdef^^d0{\DH}
9143: \gdef^^d1{\'N}
9144: \gdef^^d2{\v N}
9145: \gdef^^d3{\'O}
9146: \gdef^^d4{\^O}
9147: \gdef^^d5{\H O}
9148: \gdef^^d6{\"O}
9149: \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
9150: \gdef^^d8{\v R}
9151: \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
9152: \gdef^^da{\'U}
9153: \gdef^^db{\H U}
9154: \gdef^^dc{\"U}
9155: \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
9156: \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
9157: \gdef^^df{\ss}
9158: %
9159: \gdef^^e0{\'r}
9160: \gdef^^e1{\'a}
9161: \gdef^^e2{\^a}
9162: \gdef^^e3{\u a}
9163: \gdef^^e4{\"a}
9164: \gdef^^e5{\'l}
9165: \gdef^^e6{\'c}
9166: \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
9167: \gdef^^e8{\v c}
9168: \gdef^^e9{\'e}
9169: \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
9170: \gdef^^eb{\"e}
9171: \gdef^^ec{\v e}
9172: \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9173: \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9174: \gdef^^ef{\v d}
9175: %
9176: \gdef^^f0{\dh}
9177: \gdef^^f1{\'n}
9178: \gdef^^f2{\v n}
9179: \gdef^^f3{\'o}
9180: \gdef^^f4{\^o}
9181: \gdef^^f5{\H o}
9182: \gdef^^f6{\"o}
9183: \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
9184: \gdef^^f8{\v r}
9185: \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
9186: \gdef^^fa{\'u}
9187: \gdef^^fb{\H u}
9188: \gdef^^fc{\"u}
9189: \gdef^^fd{\'y}
9190: \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
9191: \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
9192: }
9193:
9194: % UTF-8 character definitions.
9195: %
9196: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
9197: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
9198: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
9199: %
9200: \newcount\countUTFx
9201: \newcount\countUTFy
9202: \newcount\countUTFz
9203:
9204: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
9205: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
9206: %
9207: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
9208: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
9209: %
9210: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
9211: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
9212:
9213: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
9214: \ifx #1\relax
9215: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
9216: \else
9217: \expandafter #1%
9218: \fi
9219: }
9220:
9221: \begingroup
9222: \catcode`\~13
9223: \catcode`\"12
9224:
9225: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
9226: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
9227: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
9228: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
9229: \advance\countUTFx by 1
9230: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
9231: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
9232: \fi}
9233:
9234: \countUTFx = "C2
9235: \countUTFy = "E0
9236: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9237: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
9238: \UTFviiiLoop
9239:
9240: \countUTFx = "E0
9241: \countUTFy = "F0
9242: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9243: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
9244: \UTFviiiLoop
9245:
9246: \countUTFx = "F0
9247: \countUTFy = "F4
9248: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9249: \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
9250: \UTFviiiLoop
9251: \endgroup
9252:
9253: \begingroup
9254: \catcode`\"=12
9255: \catcode`\<=12
9256: \catcode`\.=12
9257: \catcode`\,=12
9258: \catcode`\;=12
9259: \catcode`\!=12
9260: \catcode`\~=13
9261:
9262: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
9263: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
9264: %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
9265: \begingroup
9266: \parseXMLCharref
9267: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
9268: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
9269: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
9270: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
9271: \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
9272: \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
9273: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9274: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9275: \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
9276: \endgroup}
9277:
9278: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
9279: \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
9280: \errhelp = \EMsimple
9281: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
9282: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
9283: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9284: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
9285: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
9286: \parseUTFviiiA;%
9287: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9288: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
9289: \else
9290: \parseUTFviiiA;%
9291: \parseUTFviiiA,%
9292: \parseUTFviiiA!%
9293: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
9294: \fi\fi\fi
9295: }
9296:
9297: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
9298: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
9299: \divide\countUTFz by 64
9300: \countUTFy = \countUTFz
9301: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
9302: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
9303: \advance\countUTFx by 128
9304: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
9305: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
9306:
9307: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
9308: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
9309: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
9310: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
9311: \endgroup
9312:
9313: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
9314: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
9315: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
9316: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
9317: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
9318: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
9319: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
9320: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
9321: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
9322: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
9323: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
9324:
9325: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
9326: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
9327: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
9328: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
9329: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
9330: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
9331:
9332: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
9333: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
9334: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
9335: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
9336: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
9337: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
9338: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
9339: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
9340: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
9341: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
9342: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
9343: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
9344: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
9345: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
9346: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
9347: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
9348:
9349: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
9350: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
9351: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
9352: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
9353: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
9354: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
9355: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
9356: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
9357: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
9358: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
9359: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
9360: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
9361: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
9362: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
9363: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
9364:
9365: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
9366: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
9367: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
9368: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
9369: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
9370: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
9371: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
9372: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
9373: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
9374: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
9375: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
9376: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
9377: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
9378: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9379: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9380: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
9381:
9382: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
9383: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
9384: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
9385: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
9386: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
9387: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
9388: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
9389: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
9390: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
9391: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
9392: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
9393: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
9394: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
9395: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
9396: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
9397:
9398: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
9399: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
9400: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
9401: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
9402: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
9403: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
9404: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
9405: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
9406: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
9407: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
9408: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
9409: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
9410: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
9411: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
9412: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
9413: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
9414: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
9415:
9416: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
9417: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
9418: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
9419: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
9420: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
9421: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
9422: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
9423: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
9424: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
9425: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
9426: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
9427: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
9428:
9429: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
9430: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
9431: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
9432: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
9433: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
9434: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
9435: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
9436: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
9437: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
9438: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
9439:
9440: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
9441: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
9442: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
9443: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
9444: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
9445: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
9446: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
9447: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
9448:
9449: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
9450: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
9451: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
9452: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
9453: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
9454: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
9455: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
9456: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
9457: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
9458: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
9459:
9460: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
9461: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
9462: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
9463: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
9464: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
9465: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
9466: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
9467: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
9468: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
9469: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
9470: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
9471: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
9472: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
9473: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
9474:
9475: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
9476: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
9477: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
9478: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
9479: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
9480:
9481: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
9482: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
9483: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
9484: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
9485: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
9486: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
9487: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
9488: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
9489:
9490: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
9491: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
9492: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
9493: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
9494: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
9495: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
9496: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
9497: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
9498: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
9499: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
9500: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
9501: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
9502: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
9503:
9504: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
9505: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
9506: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
9507: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
9508: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
9509: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
9510: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
9511: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
9512: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
9513: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
9514: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
9515: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
9516:
9517: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
9518: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
9519: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
9520: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
9521: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
9522:
9523: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
9524: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
9525: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
9526: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
9527: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
9528: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
9529:
9530: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
9531: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
9532: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
9533: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
9534: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
9535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
9536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
9537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
9538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
9539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
9540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
9541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
9542:
9543: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
9544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
9545:
9546: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
9547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
9548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
9549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
9550: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
9551: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
9552:
9553: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
9554: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
9555: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
9556:
9557: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
9558:
9559: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
9560: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
9561: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
9562: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
9563: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
9564: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
9565: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
9566: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
9567: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
9568: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
9569: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
9570: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
9571:
9572: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
9573: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
9574:
9575: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
9576: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
9577: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
9578: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
9579: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
9580: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
9581: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
9582: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
9583:
9584: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
9585: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
9586: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
9587: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
9588: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
9589: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
9590: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
9591: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
9592: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
9593: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
9594: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
9595: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
9596:
9597: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
9598: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
9599: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
9600: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
9601: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
9602: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
9603: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
9604: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
9605: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
9606: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
9607:
9608: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
9609: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
9610: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
9611: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
9612: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
9613: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
9614: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
9615: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
9616: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
9617: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
9618:
9619: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
9620: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
9621: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
9622: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
9623: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
9624: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
9625: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
9626: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
9627: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
9628: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
9629:
9630: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
9631: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
9632: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
9633: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
9634:
9635: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
9636: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
9637: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
9638: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
9639: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
9640: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
9641: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
9642: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
9643: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
9644: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
9645: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
9646: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
9647: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
9648: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
9649: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
9650: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
9651:
9652: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
9653: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
9654: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
9655: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
9656: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
9657: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
9658: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
9659: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
9660: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
9661: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
9662:
9663: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
9664: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
9665:
9666: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
9667: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
9668: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
9669: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
9670:
9671: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
9672: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
9673: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
9674: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
9675:
9676: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
9677: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
9678:
9679: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
9680: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
9681: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
9682:
9683: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
9684: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
9685:
9686: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
9687: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
9688: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
9689: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
9690: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
9691: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
9692: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
9693: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
9694: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
9695: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
9696: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
9697: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
9698: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
9699:
9700: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
9701: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
9702:
9703: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
9704: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
9705: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
9706: }% end of \utfeightchardefs
9707:
9708:
9709: % US-ASCII character definitions.
9710: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
9711: \relax
9712: }
9713:
9714: % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
9715: % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
9716: % document encoding.
9717: %
9718: \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
9719:
9720:
9721: \message{formatting,}
9722:
9723: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
9724:
9725: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
9726: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
9727: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
9728:
9729: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
9730: \vbadness = 10000
9731:
9732: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
9733: \hbadness = 6666
9734:
9735: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
9736: \widowpenalty=10000
9737: \clubpenalty=10000
9738:
9739: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
9740: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
9741: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
9742: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
9743: %
9744: \def\setemergencystretch{%
9745: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
9746: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
9747: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
9748: \else
9749: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
9750: \fi
9751: }
9752:
9753: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
9754: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
9755: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
9756: %
9757: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
9758: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
9759: %
9760: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
9761: \voffset = #3\relax
9762: \topskip = #6\relax
9763: \splittopskip = \topskip
9764: %
9765: \vsize = #1\relax
9766: \advance\vsize by \topskip
9767: \outervsize = \vsize
9768: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
9769: \pageheight = \vsize
9770: %
9771: \hsize = #2\relax
9772: \outerhsize = \hsize
9773: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
9774: \pagewidth = \hsize
9775: %
9776: \normaloffset = #4\relax
9777: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
9778: %
9779: \ifpdf
9780: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
9781: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
9782: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
9783: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
9784: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
9785: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
9786: \fi
9787: %
9788: \setleading{\textleading}
9789: %
9790: \parindent = \defaultparindent
9791: \setemergencystretch
9792: }
9793:
9794: % @letterpaper (the default).
9795: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9796: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9797: \textleading = 13.2pt
9798: %
9799: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
9800: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
9801: {\voffset}{.25in}%
9802: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
9803: {11in}{8.5in}%
9804: }}
9805:
9806: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
9807: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9808: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
9809: \textleading = 12pt
9810: %
9811: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
9812: {-.2in}{0in}%
9813: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
9814: {9.25in}{7in}%
9815: %
9816: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
9817: \tolerance = 700
9818: \hfuzz = 1pt
9819: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9820: \defbodyindent = .5cm
9821: }}
9822:
9823: % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
9824: % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
9825: \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9826: \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
9827: \textleading = 12pt
9828: %
9829: \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
9830: {-.2in}{-.4in}%
9831: {0pt}{14pt}%
9832: {9in}{6in}%
9833: %
9834: \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
9835: \tolerance = 700
9836: \hfuzz = 1pt
9837: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9838: \defbodyindent = .4cm
9839: }}
9840:
9841: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
9842: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9843: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9844: \textleading = 13.2pt
9845: %
9846: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
9847: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
9848: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
9849: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
9850: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
9851: % your texinfo source file like this:
9852: % @tex
9853: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
9854: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
9855: % @end tex
9856: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
9857: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9858: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9859: {297mm}{210mm}%
9860: %
9861: \tolerance = 700
9862: \hfuzz = 1pt
9863: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9864: \defbodyindent = 5mm
9865: }}
9866:
9867: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
9868: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
9869: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
9870: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9871: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
9872: \textleading = 12.5pt
9873: %
9874: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
9875: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9876: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
9877: {210mm}{148mm}%
9878: %
9879: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
9880: \tolerance = 800
9881: \hfuzz = 1.2pt
9882: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9883: \defbodyindent = 2mm
9884: \tableindent = 12mm
9885: }}
9886:
9887: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
9888: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
9889: \afourpaper
9890: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
9891: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
9892: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9893: {297mm}{210mm}%
9894: %
9895: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
9896: \globaldefs = 0
9897: }}
9898:
9899: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
9900: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
9901: \afourpaper
9902: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
9903: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
9904: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9905: {297mm}{210mm}%
9906: \globaldefs = 0
9907: }}
9908:
9909: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
9910: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
9911: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
9912: %
9913: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
9914: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
9915: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
9916: \globaldefs = 1
9917: %
9918: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9919: \setleading{\textleading}%
9920: %
9921: \dimen0 = #1\relax
9922: \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
9923: %
9924: \dimen2 = \hsize
9925: \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
9926: %
9927: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
9928: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
9929: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9930: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
9931: }}
9932:
9933: % Set default to letter.
9934: %
9935: \letterpaper
9936:
9937:
9938: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
9939:
9940: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
9941:
9942: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
9943: \catcode`\^^? = 14
9944:
9945: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
9946: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
9947: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
9948: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
9949: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
9950: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
9951: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
9952: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
9953: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
9954: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
9955:
9956: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
9957: % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
9958: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
9959: %
9960: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
9961: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
9962: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
9963: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
9964: %
9965: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9966:
9967: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
9968: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
9969: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
9970: % this is not a problem.
9971: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9972:
9973: % Turn off all special characters except @
9974: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
9975: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
9976: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
9977:
9978: \catcode`\"=\active
9979: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
9980: \let"=\activedoublequote
9981: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
9982: \chardef\hat=`\^
9983: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hat}} \let^ = \activehat
9984:
9985: \catcode`\_=\active
9986: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
9987: \let\realunder=_
9988: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
9989: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
9990:
9991: \catcode`\|=\active
9992: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
9993:
9994: \chardef \less=`\<
9995: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
9996: \chardef \gtr=`\>
9997: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
9998: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
9999: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
10000:
10001: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
10002: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
10003: \def\texinfochars{%
10004: \let< = \activeless
10005: \let> = \activegtr
10006: \let~ = \activetilde
10007: \let^ = \activehat
10008: \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
10009: \let\b = \strong
10010: \let\i = \smartitalic
10011: % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
10012: }
10013:
10014: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
10015: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
10016: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
10017: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
10018: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
10019:
10020: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
10021: % parsing them.
10022: \def\turnoffactive{%
10023: \normalturnoffactive
10024: \otherbackslash
10025: }
10026:
10027: \catcode`\@=0
10028:
10029: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
10030: % as in \char`\\.
10031: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
10032: \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
10033:
10034: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
10035: % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
10036: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
10037:
10038: % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
10039: % in fixed width font.
10040: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
10041:
10042: % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
10043: % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
10044: % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
10045: % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
10046: % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
10047: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
10048: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
10049: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
10050: @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
10051: @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
10052:
10053: % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
10054: % @let \ = @normalbackslash
10055: % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
10056: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
10057: % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
10058: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
10059: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
10060:
10061: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
10062: % the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in
10063: % case the active - from code has slipped in.
10064: %
10065: {@catcode`- = @active
10066: @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
10067: @let-=@normaldash
10068: @let"=@normaldoublequote
10069: @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
10070: @let+=@normalplus
10071: @let<=@normalless
10072: @let>=@normalgreater
10073: @let\=@normalbackslash
10074: @let^=@normalcaret
10075: @let_=@normalunderscore
10076: @let|=@normalverticalbar
10077: @let~=@normaltilde
10078: @markupsetuplqdefault
10079: @markupsetuprqdefault
10080: @unsepspaces
10081: }
10082: }
10083:
10084: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
10085: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
10086: @otherifyactive
10087:
10088: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
10089: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
10090: % a backslash.
10091: %
10092: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
10093: @global@let\ = @eatinput
10094:
10095: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
10096: % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
10097: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
10098: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
10099: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
10100: %
10101: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
10102: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
10103: @catcode`+=@active
10104: @catcode`@_=@active
10105: }
10106:
10107: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
10108: @escapechar = `@@
10109:
10110: % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
10111: % active definitions as the normal characters.
10112: @def@normaldot{.}
10113: @def@normalquest{?}
10114: @def@normalslash{/}
10115:
10116: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
10117: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
10118: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
10119: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
10120: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
10121:
10122: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
10123:
10124: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
10125: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
10126: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
10127: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
10128: @catcode`@'=@active
10129: @catcode`@`=@active
10130: @markupsetuplqdefault
10131: @markupsetuprqdefault
10132:
10133: @c Local variables:
10134: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
10135: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
10136: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
10137: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
10138: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
10139: @c End:
10140:
10141: @c vim:sw=2:
10142:
10143: @ignore
10144: arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
10145: @end ignore
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/icons/cvsweb/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/icons/cvsweb/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/icons/cvsweb/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [ELWIX - Embedded LightWeight unIX -] / embedaddon / readline / doc